PLC Proworx32 Software User Manual v1.0

ProWORX 32
Programming Software for PLCs User Guide

372 SPU 780 01EMAN Version 1.0
31003882 00
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Table of Contents
Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 About the Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Chapter 1 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Welcome to ProWORX 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing ProWORX 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logging in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Authorizing ProWORX 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The ProWORX 32 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ProWORX 32 Client Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tracking Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ProWORX 32 Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contacting Schneider Electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 14 15 16 17 19 20 22 23 26 27 29 31 34 35 36 39 45 46 51 53 55 58 59 60 62
Chapter 2
Working with Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Controller Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Converting Ladder Logic Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the ProWORX Server to Manage ProWORX 32 Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with a ProWORX 32 Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Emulation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instructions Supported in Emulation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Emulation Instruction Solve Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Documentation Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Documentation Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing and Exporting ProWORX 32 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protected Registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Address Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Knowledge Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Chapter 3
Communications Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Connecting to a Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Communications Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Configuring Modbus Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Modbus Communications by Modem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Configuring Modbus Plus Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Configuring Ethernet Gateway Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Configuring TCP/IP Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Network Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Chapter 4
Configuring a Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Controller Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Controller Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Ports Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Loadables Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Loadable Library Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Chapter 5
Working with Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Initializing Logic in a Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Reading From a Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Writing to a Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Transferring Memory Contents to Controller EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Transferring the Flash RAM Executive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Transferring Memory Contents to Micro Flash RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Transferring Internal Flash or PCMCIA to Controller Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Starting and Stopping Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 PLC Status Viewer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Analyze Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Chapter 6
Configuration Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Configuration Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Compact Phase II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Data Protect Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Quantum Hot Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 IO Scanner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 IO Scanner Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Peer Cop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Peer Cop Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Profibus Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Profibus Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 S980 Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 SY/MAX Extension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 TCP/IP Extension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Quantum VME Bus Extension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Chapter 7
Using the Logic Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logic Editor Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logic Editor Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hotkey Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Logic Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurable Mnemonics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ISA Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sweep (Online Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Bookmarks in Logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Segment Scheduler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equation Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mathematical Equations in Equation Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mathematical Operations in Equation Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mathematical Functions in Equation Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 129 130 132 135 138 140 142 144 146 148 149 151 152 153 154 156 158 161 163 164 165 167 169 171 172 175 177 181 184 188 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 201
5
Chapter 8
Using the Traffic Cop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic Cop Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Drops and Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Slots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Online Module Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O Drawing Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 9
Using the Data Watch Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Watch Window Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trend - Mode Functionality Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Track Logic Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Track Traffic Cop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instruction Editor / Terminal Block Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instruction / Terminal Block Editor Display Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Script Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Script Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Register Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
PID Tuner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 DRUM Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Importing and Exporting Data Watch Window Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Chapter 10 Chapter 11
Working with the ASCII Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

ASCII Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Working with Macros. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Using Macros in Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Chapter 12
ProWORX 32 Utilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 BM85 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 BootP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Compare Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 I/O Drawing Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 The Ping Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 MBP Stat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Chapter 13 Chapter 14
ProWORX 32 Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
ProWORX 32 Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Using the ProWORX 32 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Audit Trail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Chapter 15
Schneider Alliances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Using the Schneider Alliances Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Using the Script Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Using Script Editor Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Appendices
Appendix A
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
I/O Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 800. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 A120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Compact TSX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Micro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Momentum M1 and INTERBUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Quantum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Sy/Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Appendix B
B.1
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolating Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Procedure List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modbus Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopcode Error Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Words for S901 and S908 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASCII Message Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable A Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable B Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controller State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controller Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EOL (End of Logic) Pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Global Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S911 Hot Standby Status (S908) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Local Drop Communications Errors (S908). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Health . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Word Pointer Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RIO Time-out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Run/Load/Debug Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S901/J200 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S908 Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 272 272 273 274 276 277 280 280 281 282 283 284 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 295 296 297 298 299 300 301
B.2
Appendix C
Editing .DIF Files with Microsoft Excel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Editing .DIF files with Microsoft Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Glossary Index
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Safety Information
Important Information
NOTICE Read these instructions carefully, and look at the equipment to become familiar with the device before trying to install, operate, or maintain it. The following special messages may appear throughout this documentation or on the equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a procedure.
The addition of this symbol to a Danger or Warning safety label indicates that an electrical hazard exists, which will result in personal injury if the instructions are not followed. This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personal injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or death.
DANGER
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, will result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, can result in injury or equipment damage.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Safety Information
PLEASE NOTE
Electrical equipment should be serviced only by qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this material. This document is not intended as an instruction manual for untrained persons. 2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
10
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
About the Book
At a Glance
Document Scope This manual describes how to install, configure and use ProWORX 32 and all of its components. To find out about any changes to the manual after this version was published, consult our web site at public.modicon.com. Terms and Abbreviations Numbers are written according to international practice as well as according to approved SI (System International dUnites) presentation; each thousand is separated by a space, along with use of the decimal point, e.g., 12 345.67 This document applies to the installation and use of ProWORX 32 in Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows XP, Windows NT 4.0, and Windows 2000 environments and ProWORX Server in Windows XP, Windows NT 4.0, and Windows 2000 environments.
Validity Note
Related Documents
Title of Documentation Modicon Ladder Logic Block Library Modicon Modbus Plus PCI-85 Interface Adapter Modicon Quantum Hot Standby System Planning and Installation Guide Modicon TSX Quantum Automation Series Hardware Reference Guide TSX Momentum I/O Base User Guide Modicon A120 Series I/O Modules User Guide BM85 Bridge Multiplexer Users Guide
Reference Number 840 USE 101 00 890 USE 162 00 840 USE 106 00 840 USE 100 00 870 USE 002 00 890 USE 109 00 890 USE 103 00
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
11
About the Book
Product Related Warnings
Schneider Electric assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document. If you have any suggestions for improvements or amendments or have found errors in this publication, please notify us. No part of this document may be reproduced in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, without the express written permission of Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. Copyright 2002. We welcome your comments about this document. You can reach us by e-mail at [email protected]
User Comments
12
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Getting Started
Welcome to ProWORX 32
About this Manual This manual is a guide for operating ProWORX 32. It does not contain information about specific controllers, I/O cards, or ladder logic instructions. For further hardware and ladder logic information, go to the ProWORX 32 on-line help system. This chapter guides you through starting out with ProWORX 32.
Getting Started with ProWORX 32 Whats in this Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:

Topic System Requirements Installing ProWORX 32 Logging In Authorizing ProWORX 32 The ProWORX 32 Environment ProWORX 32 Client Security Tracking Help ProWORX 32 Toolbar Contacting Schneider Electric Page 14 15 16 17 19 20 22 23 26
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
13
Getting Started
System Requirements
Hardware Requirements Hardware:
Hardware Processor Memory Hard Disk Space (Available) Installation Media Type Display Requirement P200 128 MB 200 MB CD 256 color VGA or higher
Software Requirements
Software:
Software ProWORX 32 Client Operating Systems Requirement Windows 98, Windows NT (Version 4.0, SP5 or higher), Windows 2000, Window Me, and Windows XP.
ProWORX Server - Operating Windows NT (Version 4.0, SP5 or higher), Windows 2000, Systems and Windows XP. Microsoft Internet Explorer Microsoft MDAC Version 5.0 or higher. Version 2.5 or higher.
14
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Getting Started
Installing ProWORX 32
Installing ProWORX 32 ProWORX 32 requires the installation of MDac version 2.5 or greater and Internet Explorer 5.0 or greater. Install the MDac software from the ProWORX 32 installation CD, and ensure that you have a compatible version of Internet Explorer prior to installing ProWORX 32. Then, to install ProWORX 32:
Step 1 Action Insert the ProWORX 32 CD into your CD-ROM drive. The ProWORX 32 installation screen should automatically load. If the ProWORX installation program does not automatically load, you can open the installation in Windows Explorer at CD Rom Drive Setup.exe. Select the Language you want to install ProWORX 32 in. (English, French, German, Spanish.) Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation of ProWORX 32.
2 3
Modifying or Repairing the ProWORX 32 Installation
If you have already installed ProWORX 32:

Step 1 2 3 Action Insert the ProWORX 32 CD into your CD-ROM drive. Select Modify to add new components, or remove already installed components. Click Next and follow the on-screen instructions. Select Repair to reinstall all components installed by the previous setup. Click Next and follow the on-screen instructions.
Uninstalling (Removing) ProWORX 32
If you have already installed ProWORX 32:

Step 1 2 3 Action Insert the ProWORX 32 CD into your CD-ROM drive. Select Remove to uninstall all installed components. Click Next and follow the on-screen instructions.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
15
Getting Started
Logging In
The ProWORX 32 Login Screen When opening ProWORX 32 you are prompted with the ProWORX 32 Login screen. If you are using projects that reside on a server or you want to communicate through the server, enter the login information and click Login. If you are using only projects that reside on the client, click Bypass. To access the login screen from within ProWORX 32:
Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Action In the ProWORX 32 menu, select File Login. Enter the user name and password that your system administrator has given you in the Name and Password fields. Select your method of communicating with the server from TCP/IP and Modbus Plus. Enter the address of the server in the Server Address field. Enter the timeout (seconds) in the Timeout field. If you have selected TCP/IP, enter the port number in the Port Number field. If you have selected Modbus Plus, enter the adapter number in the Adapter Number field. Click Login.
Logging In to the ProWORX 32 Server
Logging Out of the ProWORX 32 Server
Closing ProWORX 32 client logs you out of the server or to log out while remaining in ProWORX 32:
Step 1 Action From the ProWORX 32 menu, select File Logout.
16
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Getting Started
Authorizing ProWORX 32
Opening the Authorization Program From the Windows Start menu:
Step 1 Action Select Programs ProWORX 32 Authorization.
Using the Authorization Wizard
After opening the authorization wizard:

Step 1 Action Select which task you would like to perform: Authorize this PC: Sets up the PC you are currently using to run ProWORX 32. l Transfer Authorization: Transfers authorization from one PC to another. l Enter received code: If already registered, you are taken directly to the Entering Authorization Code screen. When you have made a selection, click Next.
Select which method you would prefer to authorize ProWORX 32 by, and click Next: l Authorize by Phone: A message box is displayed containing a customer support phone number and the customer support hours of operation. Click OK to return to the authorization application. l Authorize by Fax: A fax page is printed containing the information you have entered and a number to send the fax to. l Authorize by Multi-User License Diskette: This option is used strictly for uncopyprotected versions in which a diskette has been provided by Schneider Electric. The contents of the diskette will be transferred onto your machine. l Authorize by Email: An email is sent to customer support containing the information you have entered. l Authorize by Web: You will be directed to a web page at the Schneider Electric web site where the information that you have entered will be displayed and an authorization number will be generated for you.
l l l l
Select which product you want to authorize and click Next: Online Only Client: Access to online only portions of ProWORX 32. Lite Client: Access to Momentum, Compact, and Micro controllers only. Full Development Client: Full access to all features of ProWORX 32. Server: Full access to the ProWORX Server. Enter all of your personal information in the User Information screen and click Next. If you would like to view our privacy policy, click Privacy Policy.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
17
Getting Started
Moving Authorization
After selecting Transfer Authorization in Step One:

Step 1 2 Action Insert a diskette into your PC diskette drive.
l l
Select which transaction you want to complete and click Next: Transfer authorization from computer to diskette. Transfer authorization from diskette to computer.
Entering the Authorization Number
After receiving an authorization number:

Step 1 2 3 Action A Code Entry Number and a Computer ID are created automatically Enter the Authorization Number provided to you by customer support and click Next. To complete your ProWORX 32 authorization, click Finish.
18
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Getting Started
The ProWORX 32 Environment

Overview ProWORX 32 is organized in such a way that the information you need at any time is readily accessible through the ProWORX 32 main interface. From the My Computer right-click menu in the Navigation panel:
Step 1 2 3 4 Action Select Properties. Select the Environment tab. Set the following ProWORX 32 Environment parameters: Auto Monitor/Logout: When selected with Logout, the Online Network Editor closes after the specified amount of inactive time. When selected with Monitor, the Online Network Editor closes after the specified amount of inactive time and Monitor mode is activated. Prompt For Read When Exiting Online: Displays a prompt to perform a read after switching out of online mode. Compare To Project On Attach: Displays a prompt to perform a compare when switching to online mode. Enable Audit Trails: Audit trails and the log book are viewable. Automatically Update Used Tables Online: When going online, the used tables are automatically updated. Enable Scrolling Navigation Panel: When this option is selected, the navigation panel shrinks showing only the panels border. To see the navigation panel, hover your mouse over the border and the navigation panel expands. Instruction Toolbar: See ProWORX 32 Toolbar, p. 23.
Setting ProWORX 32 Properties
5 6 7 8 9
10
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
19
Getting Started
ProWORX 32 Client Security

Overview Setting Security for a Client Security allows an administrator to disable features of ProWORX 32. From the My Computer right-click menu in the Navigation panel:
Step 1 2 3 Action Select Security Settings to open the Client Security dialog. To set and confirm the administrative password, enter the password into the Password and Confirm Password boxes. To set the rights that users have while running ProWORX 32 on this specific PC, select rights from the Enabled Functionality group of rights. See User Rights below for more information. Click OK to confirm changes. Click Close to exit.
20
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Getting Started
User Rights
User rights descriptions:

User Rights Controller Configuration Traffic Cop Communications Logic Forcing Insert Delete Sweep Data Editors Extended Memory Protected Registers Descriptions The ability to change the controller configuration, or change controller type. The ability to edit in the traffic cop. The ability to change the communications setup including the controllers address. The ability to edit logic. The ability to force contacts and coils. The ability to insert cells, rows, columns, and networks. The ability to delete cells, rows, columns, and networks. The ability to enter sweep mode. The ability to enter any of the data editors, If deselected, the user is unable to change register data. The ability to edit extended memory registers. The ability to set ranges of 4xxxx addresses that are uneditable. See Setting Protected Registers for more information. The ability to edit the configuration extensions. The ability to edit the ASCII messages. The ability to use the search feature. The ability to read from the controller. The ability to write to the controller. The ability to start or stop the controller. The ability to remove all audit trail and logbook entries.
Configuration Extensions ASCII Messages Search Read Write Start/Stop Clear Audit Trails
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
21
Getting Started
Tracking Help
Overview Tracking help is a brief description or overview of the editor, instructions, or I/O card that is currently selected in ProWORX 32. From the ProWORX 32 menu:
Step 1 2 Action Select View Tracking Help to open the tracking help window. To see more information about the current tracking help topic, press F1.
Using Tracking Help
22
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Getting Started
ProWORX 32 Toolbar
Overview The ProWORX 32 toolbar holds all of the icon buttons that can be used to access features, utilities, and tools needed to properly use ProWORX 32s development capabilities. Handle ProWORX 32 Toolbar
Using the Toolbar
From the ProWORX 32 toolbar right-click menu:

Step 1 Action To add a toolbar, select a toolbar to add from the list. A toolbar that is displayed is denoted by a check 2 3 4 .
To remove a toolbar, select a toolbar to remove from the list. To move a selected toolbar within the ProWORX 32 toolbar area, select the toolbars handle, and drag and drop the toolbar to its desired location. To customize the toolbars, click Customize. To view help concerning toolbar customizing please refer the Windows help file, Windows Start Menu Help.
Customizing the Instruction Toolbar
In the project navigation panel:

Step 1 2 3 4 Action From the project right-click menu, select Properties. Select the Environment tab. Scroll to the number of the button (1-14) you would like to change in the Button Number field. eg. 1 = the leftmost button, 14 = the rightmost button. Enter the name of the instruction to be placed on the toolbar in the Button Text field.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
23
Getting Started
Toolbar Listing
Default toolbars and items:

Toolbar Standard Toolbar Item - Create a New Project - Save the Active Project - Print the Active Project - Open Print Preview - Open Report Setup - Undo the most recent action (CTRL+Z) - Repeats the most recent action - Cut the current selection and copy to the system clipboard (CTRL+X) - Copy the current selection to the system clipboard (CTRL+C) - Paste data from system clipboard to selected area (CTRL+V) - Open the Search window (CTRL+F) - Repeat the last Search operation (SHIFT+F4) - Find and Replace (CTRL+H) - Open Help (F1) Control Toolbar. See Working with a ProWORX 32 Project, p. 36 - Take project offline - Take project to emulation - Take project online - Take project to combined mode
24
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Getting Started
Toolbar Online Control Toolbar
Item - Start/Stop controller. See Starting and Stopping Controllers, p. 98. - Initialize logic. See Initializing Logic in a Controller, p. 90.
l l l l l l
DWW Log Toolbar
- Read from controller. See Reading From a Controller, p. 91. Read Read extended memory - Write to controller. See Writing to a Controller, p. 92. Write logic Relocate logic and data Relocate logic only Write extended memory - First record - Previous record - Next Record - Last record - Pause/Resume - Record
- Toggle between logging real-time data from a controller and logging stored Instruction Toolbar - A user-defined set of instructions. Clicking an instruction adds it to the logic editor at the cursor.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
25
Getting Started
Contacting Schneider Electric

Contact Information Customer support is available to registered Schneider Electric users. If you have a question about ProWORX 32 and cant find the answer in the ProWORX 32 Help system or the Users Guide, contact our Customer Service staff for assistance. You can reach Schneiders Customer Support department by Internet, phone, fax, or mail: Schneider Electric One High Street North Andover, MA 01845 Internet: http://public.modicon.com/ E-mail: [email protected] Support Hotline: (888) 266-8705 Telephone: (978) 794-0800 Fax: (978) 975-9301 Support Guidelines To help us assist you quickly, we suggest you have the following information ready:
l The version and serial number of your copy of ProWORX 32. To find this l What you were doing when the problem occurred, whether you can repeat it, and l Your version of Windows. To find this information in Windows ME, 98, 95, 2000
or NT 4.x: click Start, then Settings. Select Control Panel. When the Control Panel window opens, double-click System. When the System window opens, select the General tab. Your version of Windows is listed under the heading System. l Information about your computer, including its processor type, memory, hard drive size, video card type, and I/O boards. any error messages you received. information, select About on the Help menu.
26
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Working with Projects
At a Glance
Overview ProWORX 32 holds information about each of your controllers in a project. The project stores:
l l l l l l
The controllers configuration Ladder logic Descriptors of the controller and ladder logic Project properties Data trends Compare results
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
27
Whats in this Chapter?

Topic Creating a New Project Selecting a Controller Type Converting Ladder Logic Databases Using the ProWORX Server to Manage ProWORX 32 Projects Working with a ProWORX 32 Project Using Emulation Mode Instructions Supported in Emulation Mode Adding Emulation Instruction Solve Support Documentation Editor Using the Documentation Editor Importing and Exporting ProWORX 32 Documentation Protected Registers Using Search Address Used The Knowledge Base Page 29 31 34 35 36 39 45 46 51 53 55 58 59 60 62
28
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Creating a New Project

Creating a New Project From the ProWORX 32 tool bar:
Step 1 2 3 Action Click File New. Enter a project name in the New Project Name box. Click OK. The New Project Wizard appears.
Overview
The Project Configuration Wizard steps you through creating new default projects and modify existing projects in ProWORX 32. The configuration wizard guides you through a series of easy to understand steps to set up a project. Each step configures an important area of the project. Each screen in the wizard has a caption stating which step you are currently completing. Also, each screen has a diagram and description detailing what the current step involves. The standard wizard buttons are:
Button Help Cancel Back Next Finish Function Displays context-sensitive help pertaining to the current step. Exits the wizard and no new project is created or no changes are saved. Returns the wizard to the previous step. Advances the wizard to the next step. Completes the wizard and creates a new project or saves the changes.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
29
Step 1 - Select Creation Method
Select a path to create a new project:

Path Online to Controller Description This option sets up a project enough to go online to a controller. The first step configures the parameters used to communicate with the desired controller. This step encapsulates communications setup; use of this step is identical to the Project communications setup dialog. Click Next to display the Finish step. Click Finish to go online to the desired controller. This step allows you to set up the controller type. For more information, see Selecting a Controller Type, p. 31. This option creates a project based on an existing project. First, select an existing Project from the list of projects on the local computer. ProWORX 32 creates a copy of the project and uses it as the base for the new project. ProWORX 32 initializes the logic and clears the traffic cop of the new project. ProWORX 32 then displays a communications setup step to configure communications to the desired controller. On the finish step click Finish to complete the new project creation. This option creates a project based on a read of the program from an existing controller. ProWORX 32 displays a communications setup step to configure communications to the desired controller. On the Finish step click Finish. ProWORX 32 reads the contents of the controller into a new default project. When selecting any offline options, you can click the Use as Macro checkbox to create a macro-enabled database. For more information, see Macros, p. 214.
Select Controller Type Base on Existing Project
Read from Controller
Use as a Macro
30
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Selecting a Controller Type

Selecting a Controller Type This step includes two drop down lists to select a controller. To the right of the drop down lists is a detailed description of the currently selected controller. Displayed below the controller selection drop down list are pictures of the I/O type(s) supported by the current controller. To select a controller:
Step 1 Action Select a controller family from the Pick a Controller Family drop-down box: Compact, Micro, Momentum, 38x/48x, 484 Replacement, 68x/78x, 984ABX, Atrium, Other, Quantum, or VME. Select the desired controller from the Pick a Controller drop-down box. The list of controllers depends on which controller family you selected in Step 1. Click Next to continue.
2 3
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
31
Controller Details
The controller details available depends on the controller you have selected in the previous step. Set the available controller details:
Controller Detail Executive Cartridge Description Cartridges which determine the controllers instruction set. Select the one installed in your controller. The Executive Cartridge is available for some 38x, 48x, 68x and Quantum controllers. The amount of both Extended and User Logic memory in the controller. Select the amount installed in your controller. Available on a variety of x80 and 984 A/B controllers. Additional memory providing 6xxxx registers. Select the amount installed in your controller. Available on a variety of x80 and 984 A/B controllers. Select Yes or No. The built-in extended memory functions option is only available for the 984AS908. Memory available for ladder logic. Select the amount of memory you want to use for ladder logic from the total amount available in your controller. Available on a variety of x80 and 984 A/B controllers. Select either 512 or 1024 (1k) input and output points per drop. Available for most 68x and 78x controllers. Micro controllers only. Select: Single: The controller is independent, not in a parent/child relationship. l Parent: The controller is the parent in a parent/child relationship. l Child: The controller is the child in a parent/child relationship. Available for "Brick" controllers from the Micro 311/0 to the Micro 612/4.
Memory Pack
Extended Memory
Built-in XMRD/XMWT User Logic
S908 Size Micro I/O Mode
Click Next when you have set the controller details.
32
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Communications Setup
To select a communications mode:

Step 1 2 3 4 Action Select a communications tab: Modbus, Modbus Plus, Gateway, or TCP/IP. Set the communications-specific properties as desired. For more information see Communications Overview, p. 66. If your project will communicate with a controller via the ProWORX server, click the Use server to communicate check box. Click Next to continue.
Finish
The finish step displays a summary of the selected controller type. Click Finish to perform the operations set up in the previous steps. When the progress number reaches 100% the wizard closes. The newly created project appears in the project navigation tree.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
33
Converting Ladder Logic Databases

Overview Old ladder logic databases created in 484, 884, ProWORX, ProWORX Plus, ProWORX NxT, Modsoft, and Concept can be imported into the new format of ProWORX 32. By importing a database using the ProWORX 32 convert function, your logic, documentation, configuration, and other relevant areas of your project are converted directly into ProWORX 32. From the ProWORX 32 menu:
Step 1 2 Action Select File Import Database. The Select Database to Convert dialog appears. Select a database to convert from the following database types: l 484 databases - *.CF4 l 884 databases - *.CF8 l Old ProWORX databases - *.CF9, *.DCF l Modsoft databases - *.CFG l Concept databases - *.ASC l ProWORX Plus/NxT databases - *.DCF When you have selected a database, click Open to start the conversion process. To cancel the conversion, click Cancel in the Conversion Status dialog. Click OK in the Conversion complete dialog to return to ProWORX 32.
Converting a Database
3 4 5
34
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Using the ProWORX Server to Manage ProWORX 32 Projects

Overview The ProWORX Server is an application used to store and manage ProWORX 32 projects. The following project transactions can occur between a ProWORX 32 client, and the ProWORX Server. For more information about the ProWORX Server, see ProWORX 32 Server, p. 239. In the project navigation panel of the ProWORX 32 client, from the project right-click menu:
Transaction Select Get from Server. Result The selected project is copied to your local PC. If you plan to make changes to a project it is recommended that you get the project from the server with a lock. The selected project is copied to your local PC. You have sole access and editing capabilities for a project when it is locked out to your PC. When you have finished making changes or you want to add a project to the server, use the Put to Server function. This function creates a copy of the project on the server. The project is unlocked so that other clients can check it out of the server.
Select Get from Server with Lock.
Select Put to Server.
Select Unlock Project.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
35
Working with a ProWORX 32 Project

Projects in Offline Mode To work with a controller offline, you must create a project for it. This project stores the controllers traffic cop and configuration information, its ladder logic, and descriptors of the controller and ladder logic. As you work in offline mode, editors modify this data. Because the offline editors are not connected directly to the controller, changes made in it do not take effect immediately. Instead, when you have finished programming, you can write all your changes to the controller at once. From the project right-click menu in the Navigation panel:
Step 1 Action Select Project State Offline.
Taking a Project Offline
Projects in Online Mode
To work with a controller online, select a project, and changes its mode to online. ProWORX 32 then attaches to that controller with the communications settings provided. The online editors read ladder logic, traffic cop information, register contents, and the controllers configuration directly from the controller and ProWORX 32 writes back to it. Changes made in the online mode take effect in the controller immediately, but dont appear in its project until you read from the controller. From the project right-click menu in the Navigation panel:
Step 1 Action Select Project State Online.
Taking a Project Online
Projects in Emulation Mode
To work with a controller in emulation mode, you first make sure that the project is in offline mode. Bringing a project into emulation mode allows you to emulate the solving of logic without needing a controller. From emulation mode, you can view the solving of logic, and the changing of register data. Use the online controls to start and stop the emulator. For more information, see Using Emulation Mode, p. 39. From the project right-click menu in the Navigation panel:
Step 1 Action Select Project State Emulation.
Taking a Project to Emulation
36
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Projects in Combined Mode
Combined mode is a combination of offline and online modes. When a project is in combined mode, it attaches to the controller specified by the communication settings. All work done in the editors are made directly to the controller. Work done in the logic editor, traffic cop, and register editors are also saved back to the project file, so there is no immediate need to read from the controller to update the project file with all of the changes. From the project right-click menu in the Navigation panel:
Step 1 Action Select Project State Combined.
Taking a Project to Combined Mode
Setting the Project Properties
From the project right-click menu in the Navigation panel:

Step 1 2 3 4 5 Action Ensure that the project is selected in the navigation panel. The currently selected project is denoted by its name being part of the ProWORX screens title bar. Select Properties. Select the Project tab. Configure the project properties. See Project Properties Descriptions below. Click OK to save changes.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
37
Project Properties Description
Property descriptions:
Property Detailed Project Name Project Client Author 6 Digit Addressing Description Enter the detailed description of the current project. Enter a name (brief description) for the current project. Enter the name of the projects client if applicable. Enter the name of the project author. When On, sets all addressing to six digits, allowing ProWORX 32 to enter and display constants greater than 9999. Auto is the default, which sets addressing to five digits unless the controller has addresses configured that require six. Restricts registers to a decimal value of either 9999 (default) or 65535. Enables or disables symbolic addressing.
Maximum Decimal Value Enable Symbols
Save to Flash on Exit of Online If the controller supports flash memory, selecting this feature will save the controllers contents to memory on exit of online. Online Update Rate Adjust how fast ProWORX 32 polls the controller for information when online and running. The faster the update rate, the more accurate the data displayed. But, as the update rate is increased, the performance of the software is reduced.
38
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Using Emulation Mode

Overview The emulation function is used to test the integrity of the logic in a project without the need of a PLC. Emulation mode allows you to check discrete states and register contents, and test your logic in a "safe" environment. In the project navigation panel:
Step 1 Action From the project right-click menu, select Project State Emulation.
Taking a Project to Emulation
Setting up Emulation
Before you test your logic, set the default states, or values into the emulator, so when you use the Load command, you can debug your database file using the states you have preset. Discretes may be set to OFF, ON, Enabled, Disabled OFF, or Disabled ON. Register values may be set to Decimal, Hexadecimal, Binary, ASCII, or Floating Point. From the project right-click menu in the Project Navigation Panel:
Step 1 2 Action Select Properties. The properties window appears. In the Properties window, select the Emulation tab.
Setting Emulation Properties
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
39
Setting the Default Address Data Values
You can toggle discretes or transfer values to arrays of registers during emulation when setting states or register contents on a state or value.
Step 1 2 Action In the Emulation Properties tab, enter an address or a range or addresses in the format (axxxx-axxxx) in the Address Range field. If you have entered an analog address range, enter a value in the Data Value field. If you have entered a discrete address range, select a data value (Off, On, Enables, Disabled Off, Disabled On) from the Data Value drop-down list. If you have entered an analog address range, select a radix for the address range from the Radix drop-down list. Note: Floating point only works with two registers. All others can be set to work on ranges of addresses. Click OK to save the changes and return to ProWORX 32. To load the default address values while in Emulation mode, select Emulation Load Default Address Values from the logic editor right-click menu.
4 5
40
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Setting Instructions with Loopback
You can toggle discretes or transfer values to arrays of registers during emulation when setting states or register contents based on a state or value. To edit the loopback table, in the Emulation Properties tab:
Step 1 Action Enter the address where you want the loopback in the Ctrl Address field. Control Address - The instruction address in the logic that is checked for a condition while the logic is being emulated and Loopback is enabled. Enter the state or value of the address in the Condition field. Condition - The state or value of the Control discrete or analog. If the condition of the Controls address is true, the Loopback stores a new value or triggers a new state in a Destination range of addresses. Select the numeric system you want to enter your Condition in from the Radix drop-down list. Enter the number of scans you want the Condition to be monitored by before being updated (0 to 65535) in the Scan Delay field. Scan Delay - You may not want the Loopback function to immediately update the Destination when a condition becomes true. By setting Scan Delay, you can set the number of scans for which the Condition must remain true before the Destination is updated. Enter the address range by typing a the start and end addresses, separated by a dash, in the Destination field. If there is only one Destination for that control condition, enter only one address. Destination - The Destination is the range of addresses to be driven when the Loopback Control Condition is true. For discrete destinations, select On or Off from the Data Value drop-down list. Data Value - The Data Value is the new state or value to be placed in a Destination address range when the Loopback Control Condition is true. Select the numeric system you want to enter your Destination in from the Radix drop-down list. Click OK to save the changes and return to ProWORX 32. To load the loopback table while in Emulation mode, select Emulation Load Loopback Table from the logic editor right-click menu. To enable or disable loopback while in Emulation mode, select Emulation Loopback Enabled from the logic editor right-click menu.
3 4
7 8 9 10
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
41
Adjusting Scan Time
In the Emulation Properties tab:

Step 1 Action Enter a scan time rate between 1 and 999 in the Scan Time field. Note: This option does not speed up or slow down the emulators solving time. It only affects how fast the timers increment. Click OK to save the changes and return to ProWORX 32.
Starting Emulation
From the project navigation panel:

Step 1 2 3 Action To start emulation, select Online Commands Start/Stop. Set the emulators solve mode in the Start/Stop dialog. See Setting the Solve Mode for more information. To start emulation in continuous solve mode, click Start.
Setting the Solve Mode
Several solve modes are available to assist in emulating logic. You can set Emulation to stop solving following any number of full sweeps, after a particular network is solved, when a breakpoint is reached or to stop when certain logical conditions are true or not true. You can change the solve mode by selecting Online Commands Start/Stop and selecting a solve mode radio button at anytime when emulation is in a stopped state. In the start/stop dialog:
Step 1 2 3 Action Select the Sweep radio button. Enter the number of times you want the logic to be solved before stopping in the Number of Scans to Sweep field. To the Spacebar to run another sweep.
Setting the Solve Mode to Sweep
Solving by Network
In the start/stop dialog:

Step 1 2 Action Select the Network radio button. Logic is solved network-by-network in order of networks, starting at segment one, network one. Press the Spacebar to solve the next network.
42
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Solving by Instruction

Step 1 2 Action Select the Instruction radio button. Logic is solved instruction-by-instruction in order of instructions, starting at segment one, network one, cell (1,1). Press the Spacebar to solve the next instruction.
Solving to a Breakpoint

Step 1 2 Action Select the Break radio button. Select one of the following break types: To set a break when a particular value is reached in a register, select Register radio button. Enter the address in the Address field and a data value in the Value field. To set a break when a discrete value turns on or off, select the Discrete radio button. Enter the address in the Address field and select Off to On or On to Off in the Value field. To set a break when the solve reaches a certain instruction type in logic, select the Instruction radio button. Select the instruction to break at from the Instruction drop-down list. To set a break when a specific address is reached in logic, select the Address radio button. Enter the address to break at in the Address field. To break at the breakpoints set in the breakpoint table, select the Breakpoint radio button. For more information on setting breakpoints, see Setting Emulator Breakpoints. Logic is solved in order until it comes to the first breakpoint at which point it stops. To continue solving logic until the next breakpoint, press the Spacebar.
5 6
Setting Emulator Breakpoints
In the logic editor while in Emulation mode;

Step 1 2 Action To set a breakpoiont at the cursor in the logic editor, select Emulation Breakpoint from the right-click menu. To delete a breakpoint, select Emulation Breakpoint Table from the rightclick menu. Select the row of the breakpoint that you want to delete and click Delete. Click Close to exit the Breakpoint Table.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
43
Stopping Emulation

Step 1 2 Action To stop emulation, select Online Commands Start/Stop. Click Stop.
44
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Instructions Supported in Emulation Mode

Overview Following is an alphabetical list of instructions support by ProWORX 32 1.0 emulation mode.
Instruction AD16 ADD AND BCD BLKM BLKT BROT CMPR CNR COMP CONV CR DCTR DIV DMTH DRUM Instruction DV16 EMTH (1-37) FIN FOUT FTOI IBKR IBKW ICMP ITOF JSR LAB MATH MBIT MSTR (reg read/write MU16 MULT Instruction NBIT NC NCBT NO NOBT NTC OR PTC R->T RBIT RET RTTI RTTO SBIT SCIF SENS Instruction SKP SRCH SU16 SUB T.01 T->R T->T T0.1 T1.0 TBLK TEST TTR UCTR XOR
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
45
Adding Emulation Instruction Solve Support

Overview ProWORX 32 has the capability of allowing advanced users to add instruction solve support for the ProWORX emulator. Using a text editor:
Step 1 2 Action Create a blank .ESF file in the ProWORX\32\EmulatorInst\ directory. Name your .ESF file the same as the instruction that is to be solved. E.g.: The ADD instructions emulation solve file would be named ADD.ESF. Note: Do not use spaces in your emulation solve file name.
Creating an Emulation Solve File
46
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Instruction Solve File Function Parameters
Parameter Descriptions
Variable Network Row Col TopTyp TopVal TopLen MidTyp MidVal MidLen BotTyp BotVal BotLen UctrNum DctrNum Spare3 Description The network number where instruction is located. The row in logic where instruction is located. The column in logic where instruction is located. The address type of the top node of the instruction (valid values: 0, 1, 3, 4, 8 for constants). The address offset of the top node of the instruction (valid values: 0 - 65535). The number of addresses the top node uses. The address type of the middle node of the instruction (valid values: 0, 1, 3, 4, 8 for constants). The address offset of the middle node of the instruction (valid values: 0 65535). The number of addresses the middle node uses. The address type of the bottom node of the instruction (valid values: 0, 1, 3, 4, 8 for constants). The address offset of the bottom node of the instruction (valid values: 0 65535). The number of addresses the bottom node uses. Used only for UCTR instructions. Used only for DCTR instructions. Spare parameter.
Note: All parameters must appear in the instruction subroutine declaration.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
47
Emulation Solve File API Calls

API Call Power Flow Calls GetPowerFlow(Network, Row, Col, PowerState) SetPowerFlow(Network, Row, Col, 1) Description Power flow calls are used to: l Determine whether an instruction should be solved (using GetPowerFlow) l To pass along powerflow to the next cell (using SetPowerFlow) l To activate an error condition (using SetPowerFlow) Power flow calls can be used to either get or set a particular cell in logic. Depending on the instruction being solved, the row and col variables are used to access a particular cell within the 7 row x 11 column matrix. Single discrete state calls are used to get or set the state of a 0xxxx or 1xxxx address. The State will return with 0 for Off or 1 for On. When calling the Set, use either 0 for Off or 1 for On. Single discrete history calls are used to get or set the history of a 0xxxx or 1xxxx address. The history will return with 0 for Off or 1 for On. When calling the Set, use either 0 for Off or 1 for On. Single discrete disabled calls are used to get or set the disabled status of a 0xxxx or 1xxxx address. The disabled status will return with 0 for Enabled or 1 for Disabled. When calling the Set, use either 0 for Enabled or 1 for Disabled. Single register data calls are used to get or set the data value of a 3xxxx or 4xxxx address. Valid range for data is 0 to 65535. Group discrete calls are similar to the single calls except 16 discretes per group are received or set at one time. The arrays must contain data for as many groups as are specified.
Single Discrete State Calls GetSingleDiscreteState(RefTyp, RefVal, State) SetSingleDiscreteState(RefTyp, RefVal, 1) Single Discrete History Calls GetSingleDiscreteHistory(RefTyp, RefVal, History) SetSingleDiscreteHistory(RefTyp, RefVal, State) Single Discrete Disabled Calls GetSingleDiscreteDisabled(RefTyp, RefVal, Disabled) SetSingleDisabledState(RefTyp, RefVal, Disabled)
Single Register Data Calls GetSingleRegisterData(RefTyp, RefVal, Data) SetSingleRegisterData(RefTyp, RefVal, Data) Group Discrete Calls GetGroupDiscreteState(RefTyp, RefVal, NumGroups, State(), Disabled()) SetGroupDiscreteState(RefTyp, RefVal, NumGroups, State()) SetGroupDisabledState(RefTyp, RefVal, NumGroups, Disabled())
48
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
API Call Group Register Calls GetGroupRegisterData(RefTyp, RefVal, NumGroups, Data()) SetGroupRegisterData(RefTyp, RefVal, NumGroups, Data())
Description Group register calls are similar to the single calls except that a group of registers are received or set at one time. The Data array must contain data for as many groups as are specified.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
49
Emulation Solve File Content Example
ADD.ESF File Content Example: Sub ADDINST (Network, Row, Col, TopTyp, TopVal, TopLen, MidTyp, MidVal, MidLen, BotTyp, BotVal, BotLen, Spare1, Spare2, Spare3) dim State,TData,MData,Bdata is top input powered? call LLEmulator.GetPowerFlow(Network,Row,Col-1,State) If State<>0 then get the value of top node If (TopTyp=3) or (TopTyp=4) then call LLEmulator.GetSingleRegisterData(TopTyp,TopVal,TData) Else TData=TopVal End if get the value of middle node If (MidTyp=3) or (MidTyp=4) then call LLEmulator.GetSingleRegisterData(MidTyp,MidVal,MData) Else MData=MidVal End if BData=TData+Mdata overflow If BData>9999 then BData=BData-10000 call LLEmulator.SetPowerFlow(Network,Row,Col,1) End if set value into bottom node call LLEmulator.SetSingleRegisterData(BotTyp,BotVal,BData) End if End Sub
Note: Only emulation solve files for instructions currently not supported by the Emulator are checked for by ProWORX 32. You cannot edit built-in instructions.
50
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Documentation Editor
Overview The documentation editor, the defaulted bottom-left editor, allows you to see and edit documentation for addresses and Traffic Cop items. It hot-tracks items that are selected in the many of the editors, including the data watch window and traffic cop. To open the documentation editor, select View Documentation from the ProWORX 32 menu There are three sections of the documentation editor: Edit, Summary, and Traffic Cop. To switch between sections, select the corresponding radio button at the top of the documentation editor. Opening the Documentation Editor Properties Window In the navigation tree:
Step 1 2 3 Action Ensure the project folder is expanded and right-click the current projects folder. Select Properties from the right-click menu. Select the Documentation tab in the properties window.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
51
Documentation Editor Properties
These properties are found in the Properties window under the Documentation tab:
Property Total Number of Descriptor Lines Number of Visible Descriptor Lines To set: In the Total Number of Descriptor Lines box enter a number between 3 and 9 or use the arrow keys to increase or decrease the number. In the Number of Visible Descriptor Lines box enter a number between 1 and the Total Number of Descriptor Lines value or use the arrow keys to increase or decrease the number. Function The descriptor field is a multi-line field that can be set from 3 lines to 9 lines of documentation. This preference forces the editor to edit only the set number of lines of the descriptor. The descriptor field is a multi-line field that can be set from 3 lines to 9 lines of documentation. This preference forces the editor to display only the number of lines of the descriptor that are set.
Supported Fields
In the Supported Fields frame, If a check box is unchecked, the select the check boxes that you corresponding field will never be displayed. want displayed. If a check box is checked, the field will be displayed as long as dependant properties are set correctly. E.g. If Symbols are disabled for the project, the symbol field will not be displayed even though the check box is checked.
52
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Using the Documentation Editor

Edit Mode Overview The edit mode is a completely customizable and editable visual representation of the current project documentation. The edit mode hot-tracks items currently selected in ProWORX 32 including instructions, I/O cards, and addresses in the Data Watch Window. In the documentation editor:
To: Move a field Resize a field Minimize or maximize a field Function Click the fields handle and drag it to the area of the window that you would like the field moved to. Click and drag the fields handle. Click the fields handle.
Customizing the Edit Mode Fields
Using the Edit Mode
Enter an address into the Reference box to view the addresses documentation. To navigate through documented addresses click the previous documented address and next documented address addresses click the previous address buttons. To navigate sequentially through and next address buttons.
Using the Singleline Mode
The single-line documentation editor displays the currently selected address descriptors and is un-editable. To view the single-line documentation editor:
Step 1 Action Select the Display One Line Documentation Window check box in the Properties dialog, Documentation tab. You can access the documentation properties by select Properties from the Documentation Editor right-click menu When viewing single-line documentation, to edit the current address, click Edit.
Summary Mode Overview
Summary mode shows the most common information for documented addresses. Using the address type drop-down list box, select the type of address (Symbol, 0x, 1x, 3x, 4x, Xmem, or All addresses) you want to view. To edit the documentation of any address, double-click on the appropriate row and the documentation editor will switch to edit mode showing the selected address.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
53
Using the Symbol Filter
When Symbol has been selected in the address type drop-down list box, the Filter box will be visible. The symbol filter is a simple query that filters the symbol summary based on what criteria is entered into the filter. To view all symbols, leave the filter empty and press ENTER. The contents of the filter is the LIKE statement of an SQL SELECT statement. Therefore, rules for entering text into the filter box are the same as composing an SQL query. Some filter examples:
Filter Text S* *Switch [A-D]* *Switch* Disk? Results All symbols that start with an S are displayed. All symbols ending with Switch are displayed. All symbols starting with A, B, C, or D are displayed All symbols with the letter sequence Switch are displayed All symbols named Disk(x) will be displayed. e.g. Disk1, Disk2, DiskA, etc.
Traffic Cop Mode
Using the traffic cop editor, you can edit short comments for head, drop, rack and slot addresses.
54
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Importing and Exporting ProWORX 32 Documentation

Overview ProWORX 32 imports and exports database documentation in several formats. The Documentation Import feature lets you bring documentation from existing files or databases into ProWORX 32 without having to re-enter information. Documentation Export lets you edit documentation in a separate word processing or spreadsheet program. Note: This function does not import controller logic.
Importing Documentation
In the Project Navigation panel:

Step 1 2 3 4 Action To append the documentation to the existing project documentation, select Documentation Import Append from the project right-click menu. To merge or overlay the documentation with existing project documentation, select Documentation Import Overlay from the project right-click menu. To delete all current documentation and import new documentation, select Documentation Import Create New from the project right-click menu. Once you have selected the import type, select a file (.csv, .mdb, .doc, .xls) to import from the Select Documentation File dialog and click Open.
Exporting Documentation
In the Project Navigation panel:

Step 1 2 3 4 Action From the project right-click menu, select Documentation Export. The Select Destination File dialog appears. Select a file type from the Save as type drop-down list box. (.csv, .mdb, .doc, .xls) Enter the export file name in the File name field. Navigate to the folder where you want to save the exported file. Click Save.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
55
Import/Export Formats
Import/Export format descriptions:

Format Description
MS Word (.doc) Documentation is exported directly into an MS Word document. Each address type is displayed on a separate table. MS Excel (.xls) Documentation is exported directly into an MS Excel Workbook. Each address type is displayed on a separate MS Excel Worksheet. When importing documentation, ProWORX 32 expects these sheets to be in the same order with the same name. Documentation is exported directly into an MS Access database. Each address is in its own table. Note: It is important that you do not move or rename fields within the database if you are going to import your data. The text file (.csv) is a comma-delimited file. This file can be edited using any standard text editor (Notepad, Wordpad, etc.). The comma-delimited line is different depending on the address type: l 0xxxx/1xxxx - Address, Desc1, Desc2,...,Desc9, Short Comment 1,...,Short Comment 4, Symbol, ISA Symbol, Page Title, Long Comment ID l 3xxxx/4xxxx - Address, Desc1, Desc2,...,Desc9, Short Comment 1,...,Short Comment 4, Symbol l 6xxxx/Networks/Segments - Address, Desc1, Desc2,...,Desc9, Short Comment 1,...,Short Comment 4, Page Title, Long Comment ID l Traffic Cop - Address (HxxDxxRxxSxxx), Desc1, Desc2,...,Desc9, Short Comment 1,...,Short Comment 4 Files for exchanging data easily. By default, ProWORX 32 creates this type of file for documentation. Files for exchanging symbols. ProWORX 32 creates standard .DIF files. Most spreadsheet programs can import this format without difficulty. However, you must take special care when transferring data to and from Microsoft Excel in .DIF files.
MS Access (.mdb)
.CSV File
ProWORX ASCII (.fil) ProWORX Symbol (.fis) Spreadsheet Data Interchange Format (.dif)
dBaseIV ProWORX 32 creates standard .DBF files for use with Ashton-Tates data Database (.dbf) management program dBaseIV. Most other data management and spreadsheet programs (including Microsoft Excel) can read this format without difficulty. Traffic Cop (.tef) Concept (.txt) Importing a .TEF file overwrites the existing Traffic Cop data. Exporting creates a .TEF file of the current Traffic Cop data. ProWORX 32 requires both the .TEF and .DEF files to successfully import the documentation. When exporting, ProWORX 32 creates a .TXT file of the current descriptors and symbols for 0x, 1x, 3x, 4x and symbols for constants to be used in Concept.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
56
Note: In order to import and export using .doc (MS Word) and .xls (MS Excel) files, you must have MS Word and/or MS Excel installed on your PC.
Note: Documentation files of type .fil, .fis, .dif, .dbf, .tef, and .txt are compatible across these ProWORX applications: ProWORX NxT, ProWORXPLUS, and ProWORX 32.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
57
Protected Registers
Overview Ranges of output registers added to the Protected Registers table are protected. Their data values are uneditable by users who do not have administative access to ProWORX 32. To use registers in the protected registers table, ensure that the Protected Registers check box is selected in the security settings. You can access the security settings from the My Computer right-click menu in the Project Navigation Panel. Use the following steps to set protected registers:
Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Action From the project right-click menu in the project navigation panel, Select Properties. The properties dialog appears. In the Properties dialog, select the Protected Registers tab. Enter 4xxxx addresses in the From and To fields. Click Add to add the range of addresses to the Protected Registers table. To delete a range of addresses from the Protected Registers table, select the row to be deleted and then click Delete. Click OK to save your changes and return to ProWORX 32.
Setting Protected Registers
58
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Using Search
Overview The search dialog is used find, replace or go to addresses or symbols in ProWORX 32. From the ProWORX 32 menu:
Step 1 2 Action Select Edit Find (CTRL+F) to open the Search dialog. Enter the value you want to search for in the Find What field. Note: The value entered depends on the selection you make in the Search By drop-down field. By default the value type is Address. To search a specific area of the project or by a different value type, click Advanced. Select an area of ProWORX 32 from the Search drop-down box. Select a value type to search by from the Search By drop-down box. Click Find Next to complete a search. The search results are displayed in the Search panel.
Using Find
3 4 5 6
Using the Search Panel
From the ProWORX 32 menu:

Step 1 2 3 4 Action Select View Search to open the search panel. Select the tab of the area of ProWORX 32 that you want to go to. Double-click the cell that contains the location of the address that you want to go to. To close the search panel, click the x in the top, right-hand corner.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
59
Address Used
Overview The Address Used tables keep track of what addresses are used in logic, traffic cop, peer cop and the I/O scanner. Each address has its own cell in the address used grid. The Used tables are updated every time an address is changed in one of the above areas. The changes are reflected in the Used Table panel. The Used Tables are useful for determining what addresses are used, how they are used and how many times they are used. 0xxxx, 1xxxx, 3xxxx and 4xxxx address types are tracked. The tables reflect the content of the currently selected project; switching projects updates the used tables. If the project is in online mode, there is a separate set of used tables for the online device. This is due to the fact that the online device may have different contents than the project database. Using the Address Used Tables From the ProWORX 32 menu:
Step 1 2 3 4 Action Select View Address Used to open the Address Used Tables. To view an address type, select the corresponding tab. (0xxxx, 1xxxx, 3xxxx, 4xxxx.) To select an address for logic, select the address from the used table and dragand-drop the address into the instruction that you want to use the address. To show or hide the address used legend, click the Legend check box.
Address Used Display Descriptions
The Address Used table displays information as follows:

Display Top-left purple square Top-right blue square Bottom-left green square Bottom-right yellow square An overlaid C An overlaid D Description Address is used in logic. Address is used in the traffic cop. Address is used in the Peer Cop. Address is used in the I/O Scanner. Coil is used in logic. Duplicate coil is used in logic.
60
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Finding a Free Address
In the Address Used window:

Step 1 2 3 4 5 Action Select the tab of the address type that you want to find. Click Find Free. Enter an address where the search begins from in Start Address. Enter the number of free addresses in a row that you need in Length. Click Find to search for the free address(es). Click Close to exit the Find Free section.
Rebuilding the Address Used Tables
In the Address Used window:

Step 1 Action To rebuild the address used tables, click Rebuild. Note: If online, rebuilding requires a read from a PLC. The used tables are unavailable while being rebuilt.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
61
The Knowledge Base

Overview The Knowledge Base is a warehouse of accumulated process experience relating to a specific project. It is used to identify solutions to problems that have occurred in the past. It is also used to keep maintenance records of fixes. In the project navigation panel:
Step 1 Action Select Knowledge Base . Note: Each project has its own knowledge base, in other words, the knowledge base is specific to the project.
Opening the Knowledge Base
Searching for Keywords in the Knowledge Base
After opening the knowledge base:

Step 1 2 3 Action Enter a word in the Keyword box. Press Search. (All fields in the knowledge base are searched for the keyword.) To find the next instance of the keyword, press the Search button again. Note: You may also search for partial word matches.
62
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Adding a Record to the Knowledge Base
In the knowledge base utility:

Step 1 2 3 4 5 Action Click Add. Enter a name into the Author box. Enter the problem description into the Problem box. Enter the solution description into the Solution box. Enter the name of an image that may be associated with problem or solution in the Image field. The image name must be entered in full including the file extension. e.g. Image1.bmp is correct whereas Image1 is not. Click OK to save the record. Comment The Knowledge Base Entry dialog will pop up. Max 55 characters. Max 275 characters. Max 440 characters. Valid image types are .bmp and .jpg. The image must reside in ProWORX\32\Projects\KBImages. Max image name length: 255 characters.
The Date and Time is added automatically upon pressing OK.
Deleting a Record from the Knowledge Base

Step 1 Action Click Delete. Comment The record that the cursor is highlighting will be deleted.
Printing the Knowledge Base

Step 1 Action Click Print. The ProWORX 32 print setup appears. From here you can determine specifically what you want to print.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
63
64
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Connecting to a Controller
Overview ProWORX 32 can communicate with controllers in several ways. This chapter explains how to configure ProWORX for several common types of network connections. This chapter also describes how to select and attach to a controller, both directly, and by scanning your entire network for devices. This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Communications Overview Configuring Modbus Communications Modbus Communications by Modem Configuring Modbus Plus Communications Configuring Ethernet Gateway Communications Configuring TCP/IP Communications Network Explorer Page 66 67 68 71 72 73 74
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
65
Communications Overview
Overview Before your computer can connect to a controller (or, for some systems, the gateway which relays information to and from the controller), ProWORX 32 must be configured for your communication system. Note: To connect with each other, your computer and controller must be configured for the same communication system with the same parameters.
Opening the Communications Setup Dialog
From the Project Navigator panel:

Step 1 Action Double-click the Communications icon in a project to open the communications setup dialog.
Setting the Default Communications Type
In the Communications Setup dialog:

Step 1 2 Action Select the tab of the communications you want to use. Select the Set CommunicationsType as default communications check box.
Editing Communications Parameters

Step 1 2 Action To edit a communications parameter, double-click the parameter, or, while the parameter is selected, press Change Setting. Make the desired changes in the Edit dialog and press OK to save changes.
Communicating Using the Server

Step 1 2 Action Ensure that you are logged on to the ProWORX Server. To communicate with PLCs through the servers communications portal, select the Use Server to Communicate check box.
66
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Configuring Modbus Communications

Overview Modicons master/slave protocol, standard on 984 and many other controllers. Select this option if your computer is connected to a controllers Modbus port, either directly or through a modem. Note: The controller must have the same Modbus settings as the computer. Set Modbus parameters for your PLC with the Ports tab of the Controller Configuration window or with its DIP switches.
Setting Modbus Parameters
Select the Modbus tab and set the following communications parameters:
Parameter Modbus Address Port Description The Modbus address of the PLC. Identifies which serial port on your PC is connected to the controller or modem (if you are connecting to the controller through one). Default is COM1. Sets the data transfer speed of your PCs serial port in bits per second. The PC and controller must be set to the same baud. Default is 9600. Adds a check bit to a packet to make the number of binary ones always either odd (Odd parity) or even (Even parity). If parity is set to None, the check bit is not added. The PC and controller must use the same parity. Default is Even. Sets the number of bits at the end of a packet prepares the receiving device for the next packet. The PC and controller must use the same number of stop bits. Default is 1. Identifies which data protocol (Remote Terminal Unit or ASCII) to use. Both the PC and controller must use the same data protocol. Default is RTU. Specifies the length of time the PC will wait for successful communication with a controller before displaying an error message. Default is 3 seconds. If your computer is connected directly to the controller, set the Modem Type to None. If your computer is directed to the controller through a modem it must be configured. See Modbus Communications by Modem.
Baud Rate
Parity
Stop Bits
Data Mode
Timeout
Modem Type
When you have finished configuring the parameters, press OK.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
67
Modbus Communications by Modem

Overview Controllers in remote locations can be equipped with RS-232 modems. Your computer can then connect to the controller (by telephone, radio, or microwave systems) using its own modem. Once the connection is established, the computer and controller behave as if they were connected directly through a Modbus network. You can easily configure ProWORX 32 to connect to controllers through dial-up and dedicated-line modems. Before you begin, confirm that:
l The controller is properly connected to its RS-232 modem. l Your computer is properly connected to its modem. l The modems DIP switches, if they have them, are set like this:
DIP Switch Settings:
Modem DIP Switch Setting Data Terminal Ready Always On Verbal Word Results Result Code Display Enabled Command mode local echo Auto Answer Carrier Detect Normal Load Non-Volatile RAM Defaults Use AT Command Set (Smart Mode) Example: US Robotics Modem DIP Switches (seen from back) Switch 1 (on left): Down Switch 2: Up Switch 3: Down Switch 4: Up Switch 5: Up Switch 6: Up Switch 7: Up Switch 8 (on right): Down
After configuring ProWORX 32 to use a modem, it checks to see whether there is an active connection each time you select a device on your network.
l If it cannot find one, ProWORX 32 asks you for a phone number to dial or, if your l If it finds a connection (or after opening one), you can choose to select a Modbus
device or close the connection and open a new one. Use a modem connection to a controller just like a direct Modbus link. You can scan for and attach to Modbus devices (and Modbus Plus devices, if the controller supports Bridge Mode to allow you to connect to a Modbus Plus network) just as you normally would. modem uses a dedicated line, opens a connection automatically.
68
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Setting the Modbus Modem Parameters

Step 1 2 Action Select the Modbus tab and set the communications parameters (see Configuring Modbus Communications for parameter descriptions). The controller must have the same Modbus settings as the computer. Set Modbus parameters for your PLC with the Ports tab of the Controller Configuration window. Set the Port parameter to show the computer port connected to the modem; otherwise, ProWORX 32 wont be able to locate it. The Modbus configuration must send exactly 10 bits per data package to your modem. (See Modbus 10-bit Configurations below.) Modems generally expect 10 bits in a data package; however, the Modbus defaults (Even parity, RTU mode, and one stop bit) send 11 bits per package. Change the Modbus settings to provide 10 bits per data package or ProWORX 32 will not be able to communicate with the modem. Alternatively, if your modem supports large data packages, you can set its DIP switches to allow 11 bits per data package (see your modems manual). 5 6 Select the type of modem from the Modem Type parameter drop-down. (See Modem Type Descriptions below.) To edit the modem parameters, click Modem Setup. The Modem Configuration dialog appears. (For parameter descriptions, see below.)
3 4
Modbus 10-bit Configurations
These Modbus configurations provide 10 bits per data package:

Parameters Start Bit Data Stop Bits: 1 Stop Bits: 2 Parity: None Parity: Odd or Even Total 1 bit 10 bits 10 bits 10 bits ASCII Mode 1 bit 7 bits 1 bit 2 bits 0 bits 0 bits ASCII Mode 1 bit 7 bits RTU Mode 1 bit 8 bits 1 bit
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
69
Modem Type Descriptions
Modem Type specifies the kind of modem connected to your computer:

Modem Type None (Default) Dial-Up Description For direct Modbus connections between the PC and controller without a modem. This setting disables the other modem options. For standard modems which do not require a password. If you are unsure, try this setting first. When you select a device, ProWORX 32 asks you for a number to dial. For password-protected modems. After the connection is established, a terminal window opens so you can enter text. When you select a device, ProWORX 32 asks you for a number to dial. For modems with a dedicated telephone line to the controller. You do not have to type a number to dial. This setting disables the other modem options. For radio or microwave modems with a dedicated link to the controller. You dont have to type a number to dial. This setting disables the other modem options.
Dial-Chat
Line/J478
LineRTS
Modbus Modem Parameter Descriptions
Set the following Modem parameters:

Parameter Phone Number Initialization Description The phone number of the modem that the PLC is attached to. Some modems require special initialization commands such as ATZ before they can be used. Type a sequence of Hayes modem commands in this field for ProWORX 32 to send to your modem. Check your modems manual for the commands to turn off error correction, compression, and software flow control and turn on verbal word results. Type ATDT for tone dialing (default) or ATD for pulse dialing. This prefix is sent to the modem along with the phone number you type in the Select Device dialog. To instruct the modem to pause for half a second, type a comma (,). Characters appended to every command you send to the modem, including the Initialization string and Hangup command. The default is a carriage return and a line feed. To hang up your modem, ProWORX 32 sends the standard Hayes modem command ATH. If your modem uses a different command, enter it here. This command is prefixed with ,,,+++,,,. Hanging up can take up to three seconds.
Dial Command
Command Suffix
Hangup Command
70
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Configuring Modbus Plus Communications

Overview Modicons fast peer-to-peer protocol, standard on many 984 and other controllers. Select this option if your computer is connected to a Modbus Plus network through a network adapter card such as an SA85. Select the Modbus Plus tab and set the following communications parameters:
Parameter Description
Setting Modbus Plus Parameters
Modbus Plus Address The Modbus Plus address of the PLC. Adapter Sets an identifying number for an SA85 Network Card. Up to two SA85 cards, numbered 0 or 1, can be installed. A cards identifying number in ProWORX 32 must be the same as in the Device command in the PCs CONFIG.SYS file. Default is 0. Specifies the length of time the PC will wait for successful communication with a controller before displaying an error message. Default is 3 seconds.
Timeout
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
71
Configuring Ethernet Gateway Communications

Overview A gateway connects two networks that would not normally be able to communicate with each other. ProWORX 32 supports Modicons EMBP Gateway, which bridges your computers TCP/IP Ethernet to the controllers Modbus Plus network. Note: Your computers Ethernet address is set in Windows by your network administrator (as is its sub-network mask address, if necessary).
Setting Ethernet Gateway Parameters
Select the Gateway tab and set the following communications parameters:
Parameter Gateway Type Description Select a Gateway type (SGATE, NR&D MEB, GATEWAY?) to use TCP/IP to communicate with a computer which then communicates with the PLC. The Modbus Plus address of the PLC. The TCP/IP address of the computer linking your PCs Ethernet to your controllers Modbus Plus network. Specifies the length of time the PC will wait for successful communication with a controller before displaying an error message. Default is 3 seconds.
Modbus Plus Address IP Address Timeout
72
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Configuring TCP/IP Communications

Overview Some controllers can be equipped with TCP/IP cards. Select this option if both your computer and controller use TCP/IP networking, regardless of whether they are on the same network or are connected by a gateway. Note: Your PCs TCP/IP address is set in Windows by your network administrator (as are the gateway and sub-network mask addresses, if necessary).
Setting TCP/IP Parameters
Select the TCP/IP tab and set the following communications parameters:
Parameter IP Address Timeout Description Enter a controller address in standard TCP/IP format: four numbers ranging from 0 to 255 separated by periods (for example, 10.0.254.68 is valid). Enter a value that specifies the length of time the PC will wait for successful communication with a controller before displaying an error message. Default is 3 seconds.
Note: You must install the TCP/IP Configuration Extension into your controllers to set TCP/IP addresses for their communication cards. For more information, see the TCP/IP Extension, p. 125. When you have finished configuring the parameters, press OK.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
73
Network Explorer
Overview The Network Explorer finds controllers, bridges, bridge multiplexers, and other devices attached to networks. ProWORX 32 displays the devices it finds by their address number and also shows their type, mode, and status. The results of a network scan are displayed in the panel tree on the left of the display. If any PLCs are found, they are displayed on the right panel. The right panel has two different views, the graphical, and the list view. The graphical view displays a picture of the series of controller found, along with all of its data. The list view displays the data in a spreadsheet format. Using the Network Explorer To access the network explorer:
Step 1 Action From the utilities menu in the project navigation, select Network Explorer. The communications editor is launched. You can also access the Network Explorer from the communications editor by clicking Network Explorer at the bottom right of any of the communication types tab. Select the default communications type in the Communications Overview, p. 66. Click OK if you have opened the Explorer through the Utilities menu, or click Network Explorer if you are running the Network Explorer from the communications editor. To return to the communications editor at any time, click Communications Setup. To switch between views, select either the Graphical View radio button or the List View radio button. The following information is provided for each controller found: Project Name - In certain controllers, you can save the project name inside of a loadable. The project name will be retrieved if the controller is running and the loadable is in logic. l Controller Address l Controller Type l Current State of the Controller: Running, Optimized, Stopped (the Stopcode is displayed). For more information, see Stopcode Error Analysis, p. 277. l Current State of the Battery on the Controller: Good or Bad. l Current State of the Memory Protect Switch of the Controller: On or Off.
3 4 5
74
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Configuring a Controller
Controller Configuration
Overview The Configuration editor is used to edit and view the current controller configuration of the project. The configuration editor displays configuration options (properties) within several tabs. Each tab contains one or more property lists used to display and/ or edit items relating to controller configuration. Properties that are displayed depend on the controller that is being configured. This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Controller Configuration General Tab Ports Tab Loadables Tab Loadable Library Wizard Page 76 77 80 83 86
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
75
Controller Configuration
Overview Before you begin, use the Creating a New Project, p. 29 to select the right type of controller. The options that appear in the configuration editor depend on the controller type, so if the wrong one is selected, you can spend time configuring options your controller does not support. From the project navigation panel:
Step 1 2 Action Click the Configuration icon Click the tab for the options you want to configure: General - Configures a controllers memory, including the number of coils and registers, I/O cards and drops, the amount of memory set aside for Configuration Extensions, and the number and size of the ASCII messages you want to use. l Ports - Configures the controllers serial and ASCII ports. l Loadables - Extensions to a controller's capabilities. When they appear as instructions (most of the time) they are represented as 3 node instructions.
3 4
Update parameters by clicking on the parameter row. Press ENTER to accept the changes or ESC to decline the changes. The changes made will be saved to the project or controller when the configuration editor is closed. A prompt is displayed allowing you to confirm that you want to save changes.
76
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
General Tab
Overview This tab in the Controller Configuration window allows you to configure a controllers memory. It contains many important options, including the number of coils, registers, segments of logic, and I/O cards the controller will use, the amount of memory it sets aside for configuration extensions, and the number and size of its ASCII messages. The following parameters are editable:
Parameter Registers Description For each of the 0xxxx, 1xxxx, 3xxxx, and 4xxxx register fields, type the number of registers the controller will use. The controller polls all of these registers each scan, so to keep your controller scanning quickly, set up only as many registers as you need. Type the number of logic segments the controller will use. Different controllers use different I/O drops: l If you have a controller that uses Channels instead of I/O Drops, type the number of channels the controller I/O will use. Channels always come in pairs, so this must be an even number. l If you have a Micro series controller in parent mode, type the number of children (0 to 4) associated with it. l If you have a Micro series controller in child mode, type the Child ID (1 to 4). Quantum, Atrium, 785E_LMS, Momentum, Compact (E258, E265, E275, E258) controllers only: type the maximum number of I/O words that will be available for programming in the Traffic Cop. Check your controller documentation for the appropriate values. 680, 685, 685E, 780, 785, 785E or 785L controllers only: If another computer uses this controller for distributed control, type the controllers Distributed Control Processor ID number (0 to 32).
General Tab Parameters
Segments I/O Drops
I/O Words
DCP Drop ID
I/O Time Slice Type the amount of time the controller will devote to peripheral port communication, from 1 to 100 milliseconds. The default is 10 ms for 984A, B, and X controllers and 20 ms for Quantum controllers. Duplicate Coil Start Set the starting address to a non-zero value to enable the duplicate coil range (i.e. allow coil addresses within this range to be assigned to more than 1 coil). Set the range to 0 disable the duplicate coil address range. The starting address of the duplicate coil range is part of the configuration and defines the entire range of coils that will be treated as duplicate coils. The range is from the starting address to the configured number of coils. Therefore to enable the entire range of coils, set the starting address to 1.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
77
Parameter Remote Channels Total Messages Message Words ASCII Ports B984 Controller Input Latched
Description 984A-S901, 984B-S901, and 584 controllers only: Select from 2 to 32 remote I/O channels. Channels always come in pairs, so this setting must be an even number. Controllers that support ASCII messaging only: Type the total number of ASCII messages the controller will use. Controllers that support ASCII messaging only: Type the length (in machine words) of your controllers ASCII messages. One machine word is equal to two ASCII characters. Type the number of ASCII ports on the controller. This setting must be an even number. Select the type of B984 controller you have: B884 or B886. Select this option if you want the controller to freeze the input state on powerdown. Inputs remain frozen for one scan when the controller is powered back up. Group Settling Time allows you to set parameters for input digital filtering. Each input value is polled through a filter based on a time window. You can set the duration of the time window between 200 microseconds and 19.8 ms (in 200 microsecond increments). l The module samples each input every 200 microseconds and uses the time window associated with the input to determine the input state. If the scanned input state is OFF, the input state is set OFF. If the scanned input state is ON, the input state is set based on a history queue. If the input was ON one time window ago, the input is set ON; if the input was OFF, the input state is set OFF. l The inputs are divided into four groups. The Settling Time of each can be configured separately: l Group 1: Inputs 1-4 l Group 2: Inputs 5-8 l Group 3: Inputs 9-12 l Group 4: Inputs 13-16
Settling Time
Battery Coil Timer Register Time of Day Clock Watch Dog Timer
Type the control address for the controllers battery. Type the register offset used to store the controllers timer value. Type the register offset used to store the controllers clock value. For more information see Hardware Clock, p. 152. Type the time-out delay for the Watch Dog Timer, in tens of milliseconds. The controller adds 250 ms to the value you enter. The default is 0000, which represents 250 ms.
78
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Parameter Configuration Extension Used Configuration Extension Size
Description Displays the amount of config extension space used. This field is not editable. Type the amount of memory (in machine words) to be set aside for Configuration Extensions. Use the following information to calculate the minimum Configuration Extension size: l Configuration Overhead: 1 word l Extension Overhead: l TCP/IP: 100 words. For M1E Controllers: 20 Words. l Data Protect: 8 words l S980 Address: 8 words l Quantum Hot Standby: 17 words l VME Bus: 9 words l Profibus: Approximately 4096 words; check your Profibus manual for details l Peer Cop: 5 words Links: 3 words per link, plus: -) Global Output: 4 words per link -) Global Input: 2 words overhead plus, for each of up to 64 devices, 1 + twice the number of up to 8 sub-entries (max. 8). The maximum is 2 + (64*(1+2*8)) = 1090 words. -) Specific Output: 2 words overhead plus 2 words for each of up to 64 devices. The maximum is 2+(2*64) = 130 words. -) Specific Input: 2 words overhead plus 2 words for each of up to 64 devices. The maximum is 2+(2*64) = 130 words. l SY/MAX: 52 words l I/O Scanner: 4 M1E controllers; 10 words of overhead; 40 words of overhead for anything other than M1Es; 12 words/transaction.
Skips Bridge Mode
Select this option to enable skips (segments can be skipped during solves). Select True to enable Bridge Mode. Some controllers support Bridge Mode, which allows you to connect to a Modbus Plus network through their Modbus ports 1. Note: To use Bridge Mode, your controllers MEM/DIP switch must be in the MEM position.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
79
Ports Tab
Overview From this tab in the Controller Configuration window, you configure the controllers Modbus and ASCII ports. These settings do not affect the communications setup of your PC in any way - only the controllers. The following parameters are editable:
Parameter Mode Description Identifies which data protocol (Remote Terminal Unit or ASCII) to use. Both the PC and controller must use the same data protocol. Default is RTU. If you select ASCII protocol for a port, you can only configure its Parity, Stop/Data bits, and Baud settings. Adds a check bit to a packet to make the number of binary ones always either odd (Odd Parity) or even (Even Parity). If parity is set to None, the check bit is not added. The PC and controller must use the same parity. Default is Even. Sets the number of bits at the end of a packet which prepare the receiving device for the next packet. The PC and controller must use the same number of stop bits. Default is 1. Sets the data transfer speed of the controllers Modbus port in bits per second. The PC and controller must be set to the same baud rate. Default is 9600. Quantum controllers only: sets the slot number on the local drop backplane where the CPU resides. Assigns the Modbus address for the port. Default is 1. Sets the amount of time in tens of milliseconds the controller waits after receiving a message before sending an acknowledgment. Default is 1 (10); max. is 20 (200).
Modbus Ports
Parity
Stop/Data
Baud
Head Dev Addr Delay
Modbus Port 2 Type Momentum M1 controllers only: Sets the port type of Modbus Port 2, to either RS232 or RS485.
80
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Simple ASCII Ports
Some Modicon controllers have RS-232 ports as part of Remote I/O drops. Advanced programmers can use these ports (called simple ASCII or ASCII/DAP ports), for serial communications between controllers and data terminal equipment. In ladder logic, use the Block Move (BLKM) instruction to send and receive Simple ASCII messages. Configure the number of ASCII ports for a controller by setting the ASCII Ports parameter in the General tab. The 984A, 984B, and Micro 311, 411, 512, 612 controllers have simple ASCII ports having fewer properties than Modbus ports:
Parameters Parity Description Adds a check bit to a packet to make the number of binary ones always either odd (Odd Parity) or even (Even Parity). If parity is set to None, the check bit is not added. The PC and controller must use the same parity setting. Default is even. Sets the number of bits at the end of a packet which prepare the receiving device for the next packet. The PC and controller must use the same number of stop bits. Default is 1. Sets the data transfer speed of the controllers Modbus port in bits per second. The PC and controller must be set to the same baud. Default is 9600.
Stop/Data
Baud
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
81
ASCII Ports
This table allows the user to set each port to be compatible with the device to which it is being connected. There are five properties that can be set:
Property Parity Baud Rate Description Select EVEN, ODD, or NONE. The communication speed is set to one of the following baud rates: 50, 75, 110, 134.5, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2000, 2400, 3600, 4800, 7200, 9600, and 19200. Select the number of stop bits for each data byte (1 or 2). A system with NO PARITY generally uses 2 stop bits, while a system with PARITY uses 1 stop bit. Select the number of data bits issued from the ASCII port (a number from 5 to 8). The choice of 7 data bits is standard for most ASCII devices. Select the attached device is defined as a keyboard or non-keyboard device. The purpose of this function is to allow you to modify the response of the ASCII port to match the type of device to which it is connected. In the keyboard mode, the port echoes back the input character and requires delimiters to move to the next data field and to terminate the message. Editing of input data is possible from a terminal. In the non-keyboard mode, no data is echoed back and, as a data field is completed, the next available data field is entered or the message automatically terminates. No editing capabilities are supported.
Number of Stop Bits
Number of Data Bits
Keyboard/Non-Keyboard
Micro Ports
If you are using a Micro 311, 411, 512, or 612 controller, assign its ports using the Micro port drop-down menu. The assignments in the list are combinations of the controllers COM1, COM2, and I/O Expansion Link port. The assignments availabledepend on which Micro I/O Mode you set in the Controller Details section of the General tab in the Controller Configuration editor.
82
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Loadables Tab
Overview User loadables are instructions that do not come with a controller. Instead, they are supplied by Modicon or third-party vendors and must be copied into a controller or project to be used. Loadables are extensions to a controllers capabilities. When they appear as logic function blocks (most of the time) they are represented as three node instructions. The Loadables tab displays the loadables selected and available to be selected for the current project. The display shows a table of loadables and related information. A check mark is shown beside loadables that are present in the project. Loadables with no check mark are present in the loadable library, but are not currently available in the project. To add or delete a loadable from a project, select or de-select the associated checkbox. Note: You can only add loadables that are already part of a loadable library. Using a loadable is a two-step process: transferring it into a loadable library (see the Loadable Library Wizard, p. 86), then selecting it from the library into the controller or project by checking the loadables checkbox in the loadables tab and saving changes.
Loadable Parameter
Loadables parameter listing:

Parameter Name Opcode Version Type Description User loadable name. A unique two-digit hexadecimal number used to identify an instruction in the programmable controller logic. The version number of the installed loadable. Either MSL or USL.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
83
Updating Loadables Overview
Here are two possible scenarios that would require you to update a loadable:
l Periodically, new versions of loadables are made available. If you try to delete an
old loadable from the configuration, the configurator alerts you to the fact that it is already used in logic and prevents the loadables deletion. As adding or readding a loadable can be an extensive task, update loadable conveniently allows you to replace a loadable without first deleting it from logic. l You may have read a controllers data into a project where the controller data contained an .MSL loadable (i.e. an .EXE file from Schneider Electric or a third party vendor). If the controller had been run prior to performing the read, the MSL loadable in the project is unusable if written back to the controller. Use update loadable to get the MSL loadable back to a state where it can be written to the controller. Update loadable asks you for the original .EXE loadable. It places it into the project and the project may then be rewritten successfully to the controller.
Updating Loadables
To update a loadable in a project:

Step 1 Action Select Update from the right-click menu on the row of the loadable that you want to update.
Copying a Loadable to a Controller
To copy a loadable to a controller or project:

Step 1 2 3 Action Select the loadables checkbox. The Select Opcode dialog appears if no Opcode has been set for the loadable. Select an available Opcode from the list and click OK. If you are offline, selected (checked) loadables are included in the project. Any new loadables you check off will be added to the project when the configuration changes are saved. To use the loadables in a controller, write to the controller. See Writing to a Controller, p. 92 for more information. If you are in online mode, changes are not made to the current project. If you add loadables and close the configurator while online, the Configurator makes the changes directly to the controller. (Note: The controller must be stopped.) If you are in online combined mode any changes that you save are saved to the current project and then written to the controller. (Note: The controller must be stopped.)
84
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Deleting Loadables
To delete a loadable from a controller or project:

Step 1 Action To delete a loadable from a project or controller, deselect the loadables checkbox. Note: You cannot delete a loadable if it is used in logic.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
85
Loadable Library Wizard

Overview Before you can place a user loadable into a controller or project, it must be read into the loadable library. A loadable library holds a set of loadables for you so that you only have to translate them to ProWORX 32 format once. In the Loadable Library, you can read a loadable from disk, translate it to ProWORX 32 format, and move it into a library. You can read loadables from an existing project, a Schneider Electric (.exe or .dat) or third party disk (.exe or .dat) or a ProWORX .TLD library file. Note: Reading a user loadable into a loadable library does not copy it into your controller or project. Using a loadable is a two-step process: reading it into a loadable library, then from the library into the controller or project (see Loadables Tab, p. 83 for more information).
Note: You are unable to open the loadable library wizard while the controller configuration editor is open.
Using the Loadable Library
From the Navigation Panel, Utilities tab:

Step 1 2 Action Select Loadable Library to open the Loadable Library Wizard. Select one of the following options: Edit Opcode - See Editing Opcodes below. View Text - Displays the manufacturers notes for a loadable (if available). Rebuild Library - On rare occasions, a library of loadables can become damaged (for example, when a computer crashes and files are corrupted). ProWORX 32 allows you to recreate a library from its .USL and .MSL files. l Transfer Loadable into Loadable Library - Transfer loadables from a project, an old ProWORX.tld file, Schneider Electric (.dat), or from within an .exe into the loadables library. Also use this option to update the version of existing loadables in the loadable library.
l l l
When you have completed using the loadable library wizard, click Finish.
86
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Editing Opcodes
An opcode is a unique number identifying a loadable in the controller or project. Because each opcode must be different, they may need changing. When a loadable is added to a project or controller, the configurator will compare the new loadables opcode with the opcodes already used in the controller by built-in instructions and previously loaded loadables. If it sees that the new loadable opcode will conflict, the Select Opcode window appears. However, if you happen to know an opcode that wont conflict with the loadables already in your controller you can use the Edit Opcode option in the wizard to make the change. Then when you add the loadable in configuration, you wont be prompted to provide a new opcode.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
87
88
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Working with Controllers
At a Glance
Overview This chapter contains information on how to use ProWORX 32 to work with a controller. This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Initializing Logic in a Controller Reading From a Controller Writing to a Controller Transferring Memory Contents to Controller EEPROM Transferring the Flash RAM Executive Transferring Memory Contents to Micro Flash RAM Transferring Internal Flash or PCMCIA to Controller Flash Starting and Stopping Controllers PLC Status Viewer Analyze Device Page 90 91 92 94 95 96 97 98 99 100
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
89
Initializing Logic in a Controller

Overview Initializing logic erases the networks, register contents and ASCII messages in a programmable controller. The controller must be stopped before you can initialize logic. It is strongly recommended that you read the contents of the controller to a backup database before initializing logic. WARNING Ensure data integrity is maintained. You are about to erase the contents of your controller. If you want to save any information stored in the controller, ensure that its contents have been read to a database. Failure to follow this precaution can result in severe injury or equipment damage.
Initializing Logic
From the project right click menu:

Step 1 Action Select Online Commands Init Logic.
90
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Reading From a Controller

Overview The Read from Controller function transfers memory contents from a programmable controller into a designated database. It is strongly recommended that you use this function to backup the contents of a controller before working with it online. From the project navigation panel:
Step 1 2 Action Select the project you want to read to. Ensure that you have selected the correct controller to read from and that the project you are reading into is backed up if necessary. Also, check the communications settings for the correct address. From the project right click menu, select Online Commands Read Read to read the logic, traffic cop, configuration, loadables, ASCII, state and disabled tables. Or, from the project right click menu, select Online Commands Read Read Extended Memory to read only the extended memory registers. You are prompted to confirm that you want to read the selected controller. Click OK to perform the read. When the read is complete, click OK to return to ProWORX 32.
Reading From a Controller
4 5 6
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
91
Writing to a Controller
Overview The Write to Controller function writes the contents of a database to a controller. The controller must be stopped before you can write to it.
92
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Writing to a Controller

Step 1 2 Action Select the project you want to write from. Ensure that you have selected the correct controller to write to and that the controller you are writing to is backed up if necessary. Also, check the communications settings for the correct address. From the project right click menu, select Online Commands Write Write All to write the logic, traffic cop, configuration, loadables, ASCII, state, and disabled tables. This command overwrites all existing PLC data. Or, from the project right click menu, select Online Commands Write Relocate Logic and Data to write the contents of the controller as long as addresses and function blocks in logic are supported in the destination controller. You can choose to update either the Logic, Coils Used, ASCII, and State/ Disabled tables, or just the Logic and Coils Used. Or, from the project right click menu, select Online Commands Write Write Extended Memory to write only the extended memory registers. Select all extended memory files or a specific extended memory file and click OK. ProWORX 32 checks to ensure that the controller and database match and the results are stated in the Database/Controller Validation dialog. If the controller and database match click Write or Relocate to carry out the desired function. Potential reasons that the controller and database would not match include: l The controller being written to may not have enough memory for the logic being written. l The controller address ranges many not be large enough l The controller instruction set many not match the database l The database may use duplicate coils, which most controllers do not support When the write is complete, click OK to return to ProWORX 32.
CAUTION Process Cancellation Warning Cancelling a write while in operation may leave your PLC in an indeterminate state. Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
93
Transferring Memory Contents to Controller EEPROM

Overview This function works only with Compact controllers. This function cannot be performed while the controller is running. You must stop the controller first. Note: Do not attempt the transfer operation if the controllers battery is LOW as the processor contents may be lost. Tip: Memory Protect is a switch on your controller that stops you from altering the controllers contents. The Memory Protect switch should be ON or the card overwrites memory on power up. Transferring Controller Memory to EEPROM From the project right-click menu in the navigation panel:
Step 1 2 Action Select Online Commands Write Transferring to Flash/EEPROM/ PCMCIA. A-series Compact controllers have four enhanced EEPROM options which may be set prior to transferring: l After power down, restore PLC to previous Run/Stop state. l Start PLC after download from EEPROM. l Save 4xxxx registers to EEPROM. l Optimized Mode - When selected, the controller cant be edited while online. Click Transfer. You are prompted to stop the controller if it is running.
94
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Transferring the Flash RAM Executive

Using EXECLoader To transfer the flash RAM executive, read a controllers flash RAM executive into a disk file, or write a devices flash RAM executive from a disk file, use the third-party EXECLoader application. The EXECLoader is a Windows based 32-bit program that allows you to update the executive firmware in a variety of Schneider Electric PLC modules.
Step 1 Action To open EXECLoader, select EXECLoader from the Project Navigation panel, Utilities tab.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
95
Transferring Memory Contents to Micro Flash RAM

Overview This function works only with Micro controllers. This function copies the memory contents of a Micro controller to the controllers flash RAM. When the Micro controller receives power, it first checks to see if a valid configuration is present in the data memory. If not, the contents of the flash RAM are re-loaded into the controller memory. Flash RAM may be used as an alternative to the optional battery backup, or as an extra backup of the logic and configuration. Transferring to Micro Controller Flash RAM From the project right-click menu in the navigation panel:
Step 1 2 Action Select Online Commands Write Transferring to Flash/EEPROM/ PCMCIA. Click Transfer. You are asked whether or not you want ProWORX 32 to start the controller after loading to Flash RAM. Click Yes to have ProWORX 32 automatically start the controller after transferring memory contents to Flash RAM. Click No to keep the controller stopped after transferring memory contents to Flash RAM. If the controller is currently running, you are prompted to stop it. You must do so to continue.
96
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Transferring Internal Flash or PCMCIA to Controller Flash

Overview This function copies the memory contents of a Compact TSX, Quantum 434, or Quantum 534 controller to the controllers flash RAM or PCMCIA memory card. Note: Do not attempt the transfer operation if the controllers battery is LOW as the processor contents may be lost. When the controller receives power, it first checks to see if a valid configuration is present in the data memory. If not, the contents of the flash RAM or PCMCIA memory card are re-loaded into the controller memory. Flash RAM or PCMCIA memory card may be used as an alternative to the optional battery backup or an extra backup of the logic and configuration. This function cannot be performed while the controller is running. You must stop the controller first. Transferring the Controllers Memory Contents to Controller Flash or PCMCIA Memory Card From the project right-click menu in the navigation panel:
Step 1 2 3 Action Select Online Commands Write Transferring to Flash/EEPROM/PCMCIA. Select Internal Flash to transfer the current logic to flash memory or PCMCIA to transfer the current logic to the PCMCIA memory card. Compact controllers have enhanced options that may be set prior to transferring. Set the parameters for internal flash and PCMCIA settings: l Start PLC after download from EEPROM: Automatically starts the controller with the logic that was stored in flash memory or the PCMCIA card during a power failure. l Save state RAM: Saves the last state to flash memory or the PCMCIA card in the event of a power failure. Type the number of registers to save in the 4xxxx registers to save field. The specified number of registers are saved to flash memory or the PCMCIA card in the event of a power failure. Click Transfer to transfer the logic to flash memory or the PCMCIA card. You are prompted to stop the controller if it is running. Note: Click Clear Flash to clear the logic stored in the flash memory or the PCMCIA card. If the controller is currently running, click Stop.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
97
Starting and Stopping Controllers

Starting and Stopping a Controller From the ProWORX 32 Online Controls tool bar:
Step 1 Click Start/Stop Controller. 2 The Start/Stop dialog appears. For controllers that support it, you can select Optimization Mode. In the optimized mode, the ability to edit or show power flow is disabled. You may have to stop the controller to make logic changes. The 685E and 785E controllers have a 2k buffer allowing editing during optimized mode. Once this buffer is full, no further changes can be made until the controller stops. Click Start to start the controller. Action
3 4
l l l l
The start/stop dialog box displays the following controller information: Project Name Processor Type Communications Type and Address Current State
Click Stop to stop the controller.
WARNING Controller may be Process-Critical. Stopping a controller stops a controller from solving logic, or performing I/O functions; the controller remains in the ready state. Stopping a controller may have a major impact on your process. Always consider fully the possible consequences of stopping a controller (i.e., is it performing a critical operation?) before proceeding. Failure to follow this precaution can result in severe injury or equipment damage.
98
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
PLC Status Viewer

Overview The status viewer monitors PLC status words. The PLC to be monitored is specified by the project selected. Multiple projects can be monitored at once and results in the word data grid are saved to the project. See Status Words for S901 and S908, p. 280 for more information about status words. Note: The words available are dependant on the PLC being monitored.
Checking the Value of a Word
In the PLC status window:

Step 1 2 Action Select the Update current node radio button Select the word from the status word navigation panel that you want to see the value of. Note: Single bits are colored when set.
Logging Word Data
In the PLC status window:

Step 1 2 3 4 Action Select the Record selected nodes radio button. Select the word(s) from the status word navigation panel that you want to log by clicking the check boxes beside the status word icons. Click the Start Logging button. To end the logging session, click the Stop Logging button.
Working with Logged Word Data
After logging word data, right click on the logged data grid:
Step 1 2 3 4 Action To clear the selected word data from the logged word data grid, click Delete. To clear all word data from the logged word data grid, click Delete All. To view the detailed word view and diagram of bits, click View Bits. To print the logged word data, click Print.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
99
Analyze Device
Overview The Analyze feature is very useful in diagnosing problems with your PLC that wouldnt show up as part of typical online programming/commissioning. Analyze device performs a checklist of predetermined tasks to find specific problems relating to an I/O sub-systems health and general PLC status. The Analyze feature can pinpoint problems for maintenance staff to correct as well as keep an up-to-date knowledge base of maintenance records for future reference. The S901 Analyze performs Stopcode Error, Controller Status, Battery Failed, Memory Protect, Single Sweep, Constant Sweep, S901/J200 Status, ASCII Error, Channel Communications Health, Module Health checks. All potential problems are placed into a report. The S908 Analyze performs Stopcode Error, Controller Status, Battery Failed, Memory Protect, Single Sweep, Constant Sweep, Hot Standby, DCP Present, ASCII Error Set, Remote I/O, S908 Error Set, Cable A Errors, Cable B Errors, Global Comm Health, Cable A Comm Health, Cable B Comm Health, Local Drop Health, Remote Drop Health, Remote Drop Cable A, Remote Drop Cable B, Drop Communications, and Module Health checks. All potential problems are placed into a report. Output graphics descriptions:
Graphic Description This area passed and no report entry has been made. An entry has been made into the report signifying the state of the area. A problem has been detected in the specific area. An entry in the report has been made.
S901 Style Analyze
S908 Style Analyze
Understanding the Analyze PLC Output
Viewing the Analyze Device Report
From the Analyze Device window:

Step 1 Action Select the Report tab. (The Report window shows the date and time the problem was found, and a brief description of the potential problem.)
100
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Configuration Extensions
At a Glance
Overview Configuration extensions are utilities that can be loaded into a controller. The Configuration Extensions area contains several different hardware configuration extensions. These extensions are controller-specific. Each different extension hasits own editor and some of the more complex extensions have a wizard as well. This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Configuration Extensions Compact Phase II Data Protect Extension Quantum Hot Standby IO Scanner IO Scanner Wizard Peer Cop Peer Cop Wizard Profibus Extension Profibus Wizard S980 Extension SY/MAX Extension TCP/IP Extension Quantum VME Bus Extension Page 102 104 105 106 108 111 113 118 121 122 123 124 125 126
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
101
Overview Configuration extensions can be edited while the project is either online or offline. Online changes can only be made to a stopped controller. The configuration extension information is stored within the project and can be loaded at any time. Available configuration extensions listed in the Active Extensions panl:
Configuration Extension Description Data Protect Peer Cop S980 Addresses Quantum Hot Standby Profibus TCP/IP SY/MAX I/O Scanner Compact Phase II VME Bus Prevents specific blocks of 0xxxx and 4xxxx references from being modified by general Modbus data write commands. Allows you to configure data blocks to be transferred between controllers on a Modbus Plus network. Specifies the S980 station address. Allows additional configuration of the Quantum Hot Standby setup. Configures a Quantum controller for Profibus communications. Configures controllers to connect to a TCP/IP network through a communication card. Configures a Quantum controller for communication with SY/ MAX drops. Allows you to configure data blocks to be transferred between controllers on a TCP/IP network. This extension is only available for Phase II Compact PLCs Configures a VME controller for communications with a VME network.
Note: Before setting config extensions, you must set the Configuration Extension Size parameter in the controller configuration editor. For more information see, Configuring a Controller, General Tab Parameters, p. 77.
102
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Using the Configuration Extensions Utility
In the project navigation tree:

Step 1 Action Double-click the Configurations Extensions icon. The configuration extensions window will appear showing only the extensions that are available for the active project. To add a configuration extension, select the check box beside the extension icon. To remove a configuration extension, de-select the check box beside the extension icon. To edit an extension, ensure that the extensions associated check box is checked. Then, select the extension that you want to edit from the extensions panel. The status bar at the bottom of the Configuration Editor window shows the number of words used, total number of words available and any error or status messages as they may appear. To save the changes that have been made, close the Configuration Extensions window.
2 3 4
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
103
Compact Phase II
Overview Compact Phase II extensions allow the programming of functions specific to the Compact Phase II controllers. This provides support for:
l PLC based password access l Secure Data Area (SDA) l Comm 1 CTS/RTS delay time settings.
Note: If the Compact Phase II extension does not appear in the Active Extensions panel, it is not a valid extension for the current controller type.
Editing the Compact Phase II Extension
In the Active Extensions panel select the Compact Phase II extension, then:
Step 1 2 Action Enter a Secure Data Area value between 0 and 128 in the SDA Size (K Words) box. A zero value disables the feature. Enter a value between 0 and 50 in the CTS Delay (x10 ms) box. A zero value indicates the feature is disabled. Note: This value is a factor of 10; if 5 is entered, 50 is assumed by the PLC. Enter a value between 0 and 50 in the RTS Delay (x10 ms) box. A zero value indicates the feature is disabled. Note: This value is a factor of 10; if 5 is entered, 50 is assumed by the PLC. Enter a password consisting of a maximum of 16 characters (A-Z, 0-9 and _) in the PLC Password boxes. The PLC password can only be changed while online. If the password is set to nothing, the PLC is not password protected.
104
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Data Protect Extension

Overview Data Protect is used to protect specific 0xxxx and 4xxxx references from being modified by Process Monitoring and Control software. Write access is allowed for all 0xxxx and 4xxxx references within the specified block. References outside the ranges specified are protected from general Modbus data write commands. By default, all 0xxxx and 4xxxx references are unprotected. Note: If the Data Protection extension does not appear in the Active Extensions panel, it is not a valid extension for the current controller type.
Editing the Data Protect Extension
In the Active Extensions panel select the Data Protect extension, then:
Step 1 2 Action Enter an address in the 0xxxx Starting Address field. Default - 0:0001. Enter the number of references that are to be left unprotected in the 0xxxx Length field. ProWORX 32 shows the protected reference ranges in the 0xxxx Protected Ranges boxes. Suppose you type a Start value of 00017, and a Length of 1024. The first protected range will be from 00001 (the first possible value) to 00016 (the last value before the Start value you entered). There will then be an unprotected range from 00017 to 01040 (00017 + 1024). All references above 01041 are also protected. If you enter a length that is too high (goes beyond the addresses configured for the controller) ProWORX 32 automatically sets the value to include all addresses above the Starting Address fields. Enter an address in the 4xxxx Starting Address field. Default - 4:0001. Enter the number of references that are to be left unprotected in the 4xxxx Length field. ProWORX 32 shows the protected reference ranges in the 0xxxx Protected Ranges boxes.
3 4
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
105
Quantum Hot Standby

Overview The Quantum Hot Standby extension allows additional configuration of the Quantum Hot Standby setup. This lets you set the type of state RAM transfer between the CHS110-00 modules. It also lets you set the Initial Command Register and the NonTransfer Area.This area is only available on version 2.x Quantum controllers that contain the CHS loadable in the configuration. Note: If the Quantum Hot Standby extension does not appear in the Active Extensions panel, it is not a valid extension for the current controller type.
Editing the Quantum Hot Standby Extension
In the Active Extensions panel select the Quantum Hot Standby extension, then:
Step 1 Action In the General tab, enter the 4xxxx address of the command register used to configure the hot standby system in the Command Register field. This register must be transferred every scan and cannot be in the non-transfer area. The initial command register contains the settings that are loaded into the controller when it is started. If any changes need to be made while the controller is running, the command register must be used, and not the initial command register. Settings such as port address swapping, allowing an executive upgrade, setting the standbys mode on a logic mismatch, setting the controllers modes and overriding the key switch can be changed from the command register. Enter the starting address of the range of registers that are not to be transferred from the primary controller to the standby in the Non-Transfer Area Start Address field. This is commonly used to reduce scan time. l The first two registers are used in reverse transfer operations. These registers allow information to be passed from the standby to the primary controller. l The third register is the Status register, which stores the status of both controllers. This register provides information on how the hot standby system is operating, such as the power flow of the CHS instruction, position of the controllers A/B switch, and whether there is a logic mismatch between controllers. l All registers following the third register are ignored (not transferred) during the scan. Enter the length of the non-transfer register range in the Non-Transfer Area Length field. This value can be from 1 through the total number of registers configured in the controller.
106
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Step 4 5
Action Click the Show Command/Status Registers to view the command and status register contents in the Data Watch Window. Select one of the following State RAM Transferred options: Default (12K): All 0xxxx and 1xxxx registers (up to 8192 each) are transferred. l If 10000 or fewer 3xxxx and 4xxxx (combined) registers are configured, then all are transferred. l If more than 10000 3xxxx and 4xxxx (combined) registers are configured, then (up to) 1000 3xxxx registers and all 4xxxx (up to a combined total of 10000) are transferred. l Routine Only: All addresses defined in the routine transfer table are transferred every scan. There must be a minimum of 16 4xxxx registers to support the non-transfer area. The Routine Transfer Table is a range of discretes and registers that must be configured as a multiple of 16. l Routine and Extra: All addresses defined in the Routine Transfer Table and in the extra tables are transferred. The range of each extra table must be a multiple of 16. The extra tables can be transferred over multiple scans. l All State RAM: All RAM configured in the controller is transferred every scan.
Select an address in the table and enter a reference length. For Routine Transfer Table address lengths, this must be a value between 16 and the maximum configured size for that address. l For Extra Transfer Table address lengths, this must be a value between 16 and the maximum configured size for that address exclusive of the range set in the corresponding Routine table. l Values must be a multiple of 16. The ranges defined are updated and displayed to the right on the tables as the values change.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Enter the number of scans (1-255) needed for the primary controller to transfer the extra transfer tables to the standby in the Scans to Transfer field, Select the Initial Command Register tab. Set the Swap Port (x) Addresses parameters to either Yes or No. Set the Controller (x) Mode parameters to either Offline or Online. Set the Standby Mode (on logic mismatch) to either Yes or No. Set the Executive Upgrade Switch to either Enabled or Disabled. Set the Keyswitch Override to either Enabled or Disabled.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
107
IO Scanner
Overview The I/O Scanner extension provides data transfer between two or more controllers on a TCP/IP network. The I/O Scanner lets you to simultaneously configure up to 128 communication transactions, depending on your controller. Because the TCP/ IP connection is established only once and remains connected during an entire session, it makes this type of communication very efficient. Note: If the IO Scanner extension does not appear in the Active Extensions panel, it is not a valid extension for the current controller type.
IO Scanner Wizard Editing the IO Scanner Extension
ProWORX 32 includes a configuration wizard to step you through data transaction setup between a local device and a number of remote devices on a TCP/IP network. In the Active Extensions panel select the IO Scanner extension, then:
Step 1 Action Select a card to edit from the Card Number drop-down list box. There may be one, two or six cards available to edit depending on the PLC type. Each card has an independent set of data values. Enter an IP address in the IP Address field in the format (1-255).(1-255).(1255).(1-255) This address should match the TCP/IP extension for the selected card. Enter a 1xxxx or 3xxxx address that will receive health information in the Health Block (1x/3x) field. Enter the number (1-16) of the slot in the backplane the selected card inhabits in the Head Number field. This value should match the value in the TCP/IP extension for the selected card. The transaction list displays up to 128 (64 for M1E PLCs) transactions. A transaction that isnt configured is denoted by a red X, a partially configured transaction is denoted by a yellow exclamation mark, and a configured transaction is denoted by a green check mark. To configure a transaction, right-click anywhere in the transaction list and select Add Transaction. Transactions are configured in order so if you have three transactions and select Add Transaction, the fourth transaction can be configured. To clear the configuration of the last transaction in the list, right-click anywhere in the transaction list and select Delete Transaction or press the DELETE key. Enter the IP address of the remote device that you are communicating with in the IP Address field.
3 4
6 7
108
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Step 8
Action Enter the value of the destination Unit ID in the Unit ID field. This is an identifier for a pair of transactions (specifically Link Client/Server transactions). The transaction pair must have matching Unit IDs. An example situation would include a single Server Write that sends data to the matching Client Reads in a remote device. All Client Read transactions accept the data sent from the single Server Write transaction as long as the Unit IDs match. Enter a millisecond value representing the length of time to wait for a reply for each transaction in the Health Timeout (0-50k) field. Enter a millisecond value representing the length of time to wait before repeating the transaction in the Repetition Rate (0-50k) field. A value of 0 indicates the quickest possible rate. Select one of the following functions from the Function drop-down list: l Read - A unilateral read in which a local device reads data from a remote device. l Write - A unilateral write in which a local device writes data to a remote device. l Read/Write - A unilateral read/write in which a local device reads data from and writes data to a remote device. l Link Client Read - A paired function type in which a local device responds to a write transaction from a remote device which must have a matching server write. l Link Client Write - A paired function type in which a local device writes to a remote device which must have a matching server read. l Link Client Read/Write - A paired function type in which a local device reads and writes data to and from a remote device which must have a matching server read and write. l Link Server Read - A paired function type in which a local device initiates a read from a remote device. The remote device must have a matching client write. l Link Server Write - A paired function type in which a local device writes to a remote device. The remote device must have a matching client read. l Link Server Read/Write - A paired function type in which a local device reads and writes data to and from a remote device which must have a matching client read/write. Note: For unilateral function types, no intervention is required for the remote devices. They respond to any Read or Write without the need to set up an I/O Scanner transaction. Linked function types require two complementary transactions, on in each device.
9 10
11
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
109
Step 12
Action Select a fallback value from the Fallback Value drop-down list box: l Zero - Resets the data values for the selected transaction to zero in the event of a power failure. l Hold Last - Retains the last data values for the selected transaction and make them available at restart in the event of a power failure. Type the local data address receiving data from the remote controller in the Read from Remote, To field. Enter the remote address where the read data is coming from in the Read from Remote, From field. Enter the number of sequential registers to read in the Read from Remote, Number To Read field. Up to 125 registers are allowed. Enter the local data address that sends data to the remote controller in the Write to Remote, From field. Enter the remote address where the write data is going to in the Write to Remote, To field. Enter the number of sequential addresses to write in the Write to Remote, Number To Write field. Up to 100 registers are allowed.
13 14 15 16 17 18
110
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
IO Scanner Wizard
Overview To launch the IO Scanner wizard, click the IO Scanner Wizard button situated directly below the Active Extensions panel. The wizard operates independently of the Offline/Online mode. All changes are made to Offline projects with an option to modify Online devices as well. TCP/IP communications are required only when modifying online devices. Using the IO Scanner Wizard Read the introduction instructions on the first screen and click Next:
Step 1 Action Set the transaction type by selecting either the Direct radio button or Link Client/Server radio button. Click Next. l Direct - Creates a single transaction in the local device. Data is transferred regardless of the programming of the remote device. This option is simpler than Link Client/Server but could pose more risk as the target device needs no additional program to verify its operation. l Link Client/Server - Creates a pair of matching transactions, one in each device. The server makes a request from a client which then responds to that request. This is a safer option than Direct transactions but is more complex to set up and maintain. Set the local device address by entering an IP address in the Local Device IP Address box in the standard IP format (1-255).(1-255).(1-255).(1-255) If you are using a Quantum PLC, select the slot that the NOE (or similar ethernet adapter) card resides in from the Head Number drop-down list. Click Next. To properly use the IO Scanner extension, you must define target PLCs to communicate with. These target PLCs are called Remote Devices. To add a remote device, click Add. To remove a remote device, click Remove. At least one remote device must be defined before proceeding. l Select a project to add its associated remote device to the list by clicking the Browse button and selecting a project to the Remote Device/Database box. Enter the IP address of the PLC for the remote devices project in the Select an IP Address box. If you are using a Quantum PLC, select the slot that the NOE (or similar ethernet adapter) card resides in from the What slot in the remote rack is this device mounted in? drop-down list. Click Next to return to the remote device summary screen. l Repeat the above step until all desired remote devices have been added. When you have finished adding remote devices to the IO Scanner extension, click Next.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
111
Step 4
Action To transfer data from one device to another a transaction is required. Existing transactions cannot be modified using the IO Scanner wizard and are greyed out. Up to 128 transactions may be created, except if you are using the M1E PLCs, then only support 64 transactions can be supported. To add a new transaction, click Add. To edit a transaction created by the IO Scanner wizard, click Edit. To remove a transaction created by the IO Scanner wizard, click Remove. l After clicking Add to add a new transaction, you are prompted to select a remote device. To do this, click on a remote device from the list, and press Next. l Now you can configure the new transaction. First, select a function from the drop down list. Second, enter 4xxxx addresses into the From and To fields and numeric values in the Number of Registers field in the Read from Remote Device and Write to Remote Device areas. l When you have finished editing the transaction, click Next (To see descriptions of the functions and fields, see Editing the IO scanner extension.) The transaction summary screen displays a summary of all new transactions to be written to the local device as well as the variously selected remote devices. Ensure the transactions are correct and click Next Caution: Clicking Next will proceed with the modifications and cannot be undone once completed. Note: Only offline databases are modified in this step. Click the Update Online Devices button to update the physical devices defined as remote devices by the wizard. This does not update the local device. That must be done once the configuration extension editor is closed and all changes are saved. Caution: Online devices may be running! They must be stopped before their contents can be modified. Before stopping any device, ensure that it is safe to do so. Devices are restarted once the operation is complete. Also, when these changes are complete, they cannot be undone. Click Next. Click the View Log File button to view a log of all changes made to the local and remote devices. This file (ScannerWizard.log) may be saved and printed as needed. Click Finish to close the wizard and return to the Configuration Extension Editor.
112
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Peer Cop
Overview The Peer Cop extension provides data transfer between two or more controllers on a peer-to-peer network, as well as linking multiple networks using the S985 communication card. Peer Cop configures data blocks to be continuously transferred (once per scan) between nodes on a Modbus Plus network. Data can be broadcast to all nodes on a single link (Global I/O) or between specific Modbus Plus nodes on a link (Specific I/O). A maximum of 32 data registers or 512 (for example, 32*16) I/O points can be transferred to or read from a controller at a time. Peer Cop is supported by the A145 and all E-Series and Quantum controllers. Up to three Links of the Peer Cop can be configured and edited. Note: If the Peer Cop extension does not appear in the Active Extensions panel, it is not a valid extension for the current controller type.
Peer Cop Wizard
ProWORX 32 includes a configuration wizard to help you set your Peer Cop extensions. To access the Peer Cop wizard, see Peer Cop Wizard, p. 118.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
113
Editing the Peer Cop Extension
In the Active Extensions panel select the Peer Cop extension, then:
Step 1 Action The Peer Cop extension can be configured for up to three links. When you add a link you will have access to the 64 possible devices on another peer-to-peer network. l Link 1 is the internal link; all devices on the local Modbus Plus network can be accessed from Link 1. l Links 2 and 3 are remote links through S985 cards. To add a link, click Add Link. To clear the configuration of a link, click Clear Link. To delete a link, click Delete Link. To configure a link, set its Head Number, Time-out value, and Last Value parameters. For link 2 or 3, select a head number (1 through 16) from the Link x Head Number drop-down list box. Head Number specifies the head number on a Quantum rack. If you are using a Quantum Controller, you have the option of editing the head number for the second or third link. The first link is internal, therefore it cannot be edited. Select a value from the Timeout (ms) drop-down list box. Time-out specifies the health time-out interval. The default value is 500ms. This value specifies the minimum time period a Peer Cop configured communication must fail before the associated health bit is cleared. Valid time-out values range from 20ms to 2 seconds. If you type a value too big, the value truncates to a multiple of 20. For example, 230 truncates to 220 (it is not rounded up to 240). Select Clear or Hold from the Last Value drop-down list box. Last Value specifies whether or not to hold the last value. When set to Hold, the input data area associated with an unhealthy transfer is left in its previous state (i.e. the last value with a health of OK).
Global Input/ Output
Global I/O is one of two communication methods used by the Peer Cop extension (the other is Specific I/O). Global I/O is a broadcast communication method, where a message is broadcast (made available) to all controllers on the Modbus Plus network. Global I/O data transfers do not require an acknowledgment from the receiving controller, so there is no immediate overhead placed on the receiving controller. Note: You can view the register data of any global input/output or specific input/ output by clicking View Data. The data watch window will open displaying the relevant data.
114
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Editing Global Inputs
Global Input is used to receive global data from any device on a Modbus Plus network. One entry (line) is available for each device (1 through 64). Each devices global data can also be received in pieces determined by Subfields.
Step 1 2 3 4 5 Action Select the Global Input icon in the Links panel. Select a global input from the Global Input list by double-clicking on an input. The global input properties grid appears. Enter the starting point (1 through 32) of the broadcast data to read in the Index field. In the Start field, enter the destination for the received data (i.e., where the received data is to be stored). Enter the number of words (1 to 32) to read forwards from the Index value in the Length field. For example, suppose the source controller is broadcasting 10 words of data using the Global Output function, but the receiving controller only uses words 3 to 7. You would type an Index value of 3 and a Length of 5. Note: The length value plus the index value must be less than or equal to 33. Select either BIN (default) or BCD from the Type drop-down field.
Editing Global Input Subfields
Each devices global data can also be received in sections determined by Subfields. You can define a subfield for each block of the broadcast data that you want the controller, to receive while ignoring the remainder.
Step 1 2 3 Action To view the subfields of a global input, click View Subfields. Select a subfield from the Global Inputs Subfields list. Subfields have the same parameters as inputs. When you are finished editing the subfields parameters, click Return to go back to the list of global inputs.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
115
Editing the Global Output
Global Output broadcasts the specified range of discretes or registers to the devices on the Modbus Plus network. Each device used to access the data must also be configured to accept Global Input from the broadcasting device (1-32).
Step 1 2 3 4 Action Select the Global Output icon in the Links panel. n the Start field, enter the destination for the received data (i.e., where the received data is to be stored). Enter the length (1-32) of the address range (i.e., the number of registers to broadcast). in the Length field. Select either BIN (default) or BCD from the Type drop-down field.
Specific Input/ Output
Specific I/O is one of two communication methods used by the Peer Cop extension (the other is Global I/O). Specific I/O uses a one-to-one communication method and requires an acknowledgment from the receiving device, which creates a certain amount of overhead. When using Specific I/O, the destination controller must accept the entire block of data from the source controller. This means that the Index value used in Global I/O is not necessary. Specific I/O allows you to configure multiple defined data blocks for transmission to specific devices on the Modbus Plus network. The device receiving the data must be configured for Specific Input from the broadcast device. The length (in words) of the specific input (configured in the destination controller) must be identical in length to the specific output (configured in the source controller). The input data, however, can be stored in any type of reference desired. That is, five words of 4xxxx data can be stored into five words of 0xxxx memory area. Note: You can view the register data of any global input/output or specific input/ output by clicking View Data. The data watch window will open displaying the relevant data.
116
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Editing Specific Inputs
Select the Specific Input icon in the Links panel, then:

Step 1 2 3 4 Action Select a specific input from the Specific Input list by double-clicking on an input. The specific input properties grid appears. In the Start field, enter the starting address of the block of data to be placed from the source controller. Enter the number of words (1 to 32) to be received from the source controller in the Length field. Select either BIN (default) or BCD from the Type drop-down field.
Editing Specific Outputs
Select the Specific Output icon in the Links panel, then:

Step 1 2 3 4 Action Select a specific output from the Specific Output list by double-clicking on an output. The specific output properties grid appears. In the Start field, enter the starting address for the block of data to be sent to the destination controller. Enter the number of words (1 to 32) to be sent to the destination controller in the Length field. Select either BIN (default) or BCD from the Type drop-down field.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
117
Peer Cop Wizard

Overview To launch the peer cop wizard, click the Peer Cop Wizard button situated directly below the Active Extensions panel. ProWORX 32 includes a peer cop wizard to step you through transaction setup between a local device and a number of remote devices on a Modbus Plus network. The wizard operates independently of the Offline/Online mode. All changes are made to Offline projects with an option to modify Online devices as well. Modbus Plus communications are required only when modifying online devices. Using the Peer Cop Wizard Read the introduction instructions on the first screen and click Next:
Step 1 2 Action Enter an IP address (01-64).(00-64).(00-64).(00-64) in the Local Device MB+ Address box. Click Next. Define target PLCs for the PLC to communicate with by adding remote devices to the Remote Device Summary list. Click Add to add a remote device and its corresponding project. Click Remove to delete a remote device from the list. l To configure the remote device being added to the extension, click Browse to select a project, and enter an IP address in the Select MB+ Address for this Device field. l When you have configured the remote device, click Next. Note: The Modbus Plus routing paths for the local device and all remote devices must match. Only the last, non-zero, address value may be different. All proceeding values must be the same because Peer Cop transactions cannot pass across Modbus Plus bridges or multiplexers.
118
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Step 3
Action To transfer data from one device to another a transaction is required. Existing transactions cannot be modified using the peer cop wizard and are greyed out. Up to 64 read and 64 write transactions may exist. To add a new transaction, click Add. To edit a transaction created by the peer cop wizard, click Edit. To remove a transaction created by the peer cop wizard, click Remove. When finished adding or editing transactions, click Next. l After clicking Add to add a new transaction, the Specific Transaction screen appears, allowing you to configure the transaction. Select Read or Write from the Function drop down list. Read requests data from the remote device and Write sends data to the remote device. l Enter the 4xxxx address where the data comes from in the From field. The address is from the remote device for a read function and from the local device for a write function. l Enter a 4xxxx address where the data is sent to in the To field. The address is from the local device for a read function and from a remote device for a write function. l Enter the number of consecutive registers to transfer (1 through 32) in the Word Length field. l When you have finished configuring the transaction, click Next The Global Transactions List lists all of the global device-to-device transactions. Existing transactions cannot be modified using the peer cop wizard and are greyed out. To add a new global transaction, click Add. To edit a global transaction created by the peer cop wizard, click Edit. To remove a global transaction created by the peer cop wizard, click Remove. When finished adding or editing global transactions, click Next. Note: Up to 64 read transactions may exist although only one global output transaction can exist. Of course, numerous global output transactions can be defined for different remote devices. However, once the first global output transaction is defined, the From address cannot be changed. l After clicking Add to add a new global transaction, the global transaction screen appears, allowing you to configure the transaction. Select Read or Write from the Function drop down list. Read requests data from the remote device and Write sends data to the remote device. l Enter the 4xxxx address where the data comes from in the From field. The address is from the remote device for a read function and from the local device for a write function. l Enter a 4xxxx address where the data is sent to in the To field. The address is from the local device for a read function and from a remote device for a write function. l Enter the number of consecutive registers to transfer (1 through 32) in the Word Length field. l When you have finished configuring the global transaction, click Next
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
119
Step 5
Action The summary of transactions screen displays all of the new transactions created by the wizard. These transactions are written to the local device as well as the various remote devices when Next is clicked. To overwrite any transactions in the remote device that would interfere with the new one, check the Overwrite Existing Remote Transactions check box. Caution: Pressing Next proceeds with all modifications, and cannot be undone. Note: Only offline databases are modified in this step. Click Update Online Devices to update the physical devices defined as remote devices by the wizard. This does not update the local device. The local device must be updated after the configuration extension editor is closed and all changes are saved. Caution: Online devices may be running! They must be stopped before their contents can be modified. Before stopping any device, ensure that it is safe to do so. Devices are restarted once the operation is complete. Also, when these changes are complete, they cannot be undone. Click Next. Click View Log File to view all of the changes made to the local and remote devices. This file (PeerWizard.log) may be saved or printed as needed. Click Finish to exit the Peer Cop wizard.
120
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Profibus Extension
Overview The Profibus configuration extension allows you to communicate with a Profibus network. In order to successfully install and configure the Profibus configuration extension, you will have to use a total of three separate utilities:
l The ProWORX 32 Profibus wizard l Softings PROFI-KON software, included with the Profibus hardware l Modicons SPU931 utility, also included with the Profibus hardware
Note: PROFI-KON and SPU931 are not ProWORX 32 products. While every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of these instructions, users of PROFIKON and SPU931 do so at their own risk.
Note: If the Profibus extension does not appear in the Active Extensions panel, it is not a valid extension for the current controller type.
Editing the Profibus Extension
The Profibus extension displayed in the configuration extensions utility is for display purposes only. To edit and configure the Profibus extension, you must use the Profibus wizard.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
121
Profibus Wizard
Overview To launch the profibus wizard, click the Profibus Import Wizard button situated directly below the Active Extensions panel. Follow the on-screen instructions as you make your way through the wizard:
Step 1 2 3 Action Read the Introduction screen and click Next. Select either the Create a new Profibus Station radio button or the Move configuration extension from existing radio button. Click Next. In order to configure a Profibus configuration extension, you have to have the following directory layout: Drive Plant Directory Station Directory. In the Select Plant Path screen, select a drive from the drive drop-down list box. Next, select a plant directory from the directory list or click New Folder to enter a new folder name into the list. When you have selected a drive and a plant directory, click Next. In the Select Station Path screen, select a station directory from the directory list or click New Folder to enter a new folder name into the list. The selected folder will hold the .cfg file and the .cfg file will have the same name as this folder. When you have selected a drive and a plant directory, click Next. If you have selected Create a New Profibus Station in the Options screen, then pressing Next in the previous step will generate a .cfg file. If you have selected Move configuration from existing, no .cfg file will be created and you will be taken to the next step. To configure the .cfg file you must use two external pieces of software: l SyCon (System Configuration) - Use this software to configure the Profibus Network. l SPU-931 - Use this software to configure the Profibus-DB for the CRP811 Profibus card. Once you have completed configuring the .cfg file, click Next. Click Finish to move the Profibus configuration extension into your ProWORX 32 Project.
Using the Profibus Wizard
122
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
S980 Extension
Overview The S980 Configuration Extension stores the S980 station address. This address is then used as part of the S980s mismatch detection mechanism; when the controller is powered up, the S980 checks to see if it has been moved to a different 984. Note: If the S980 extension does not appear in the Active Extensions panel, it is not a valid extension for the current controller type.
Editing the S980 Extension
In the Active Extensions panel select the S980 extension, then:

Step 1 Action Enter up to a 12-digit hex number representing the S980 address in the Address field.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
123
SY/MAX Extension
Overview The SY/MAX configuration extension allows you to properly access and configure up to six SY/MAX RIO cards. This extension is only available when using Quantum controllers revision 2 or later. Note: If the SY/MAX extension does not appear in the Active Extensions panel, it is not a valid extension for the current controller type.
Editing the SY/MAX Extension
In the Active Extensions panel select the SY/MAX extension, then:

Step 1 2 3 4 5 Action Select a card (1-6) from the Card drop-down list. Enter a I/O drop number (-1 through 99) in the Module Drop Number field. Set to -1 if the drop is not defined. Enter the number of the slot (0 through 16) that the RIO card inhabits in the Backplane Slot field. Set to 0 to remove a module. Enter a retry number (1 through 255) in the Retry Count field. Enter a timeout value (1ms through 65535ms) in the Timeout field.
124
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
TCP/IP Extension
Overview Before your controller can connect to a TCP/IP network, you must install and set up the TCP/IP configuration extension. This extension lets the controller recognize its TCP/IP communication card. For more information about configuring TCP/IP communications, see Configuring TCP/IP Communications, p. 73. Note: If the TCP/IP extension does not appear in the Active Extensions panel, it is not a valid extension for the current controller type.
Editing the TCP/IP Extension
In the Active Extensions panel select the TCP/IP extension, then:

Step 1 Action Select a card (1-6) from the Card drop-down list box. Note: Different controllers support different numbers of communications cards: l Quantum 113 Rev. 2 and 213 Rev. 2 controllers support two cards. l Quantum 424 Rev. 2 supports up to six cards. l M1E Momentum controllers only support one card and the Head Number is fixed at one. Select a head number (1 through 16) from the Head Number drop-down list box. Enter an IP address (1-255).(1-255).(1-255).(1-255) in the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway IP fields. 0.0.0.0 indicates an undefined address. Select either Ethernet II or IEEE 802.3 from the Framing Type drop-down list box. Select either Extension or BOOTP Server from the IP Address Selection dropdown list box. l Extension - Upon Power Up, the PLC will read its TCP/IP addressing information from this extension. l BOOTP - Upon Power Up, the PLC will require a BOOTP server to supply TCP/IP addressing information.
2 3 4 5
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
125
Quantum VME Bus Extension

Overview The VME Bus extension lets a VME-424/X controller control data transfers between devices on a master/slave Quantum network. In a master/slave protocol, one device (the "master") has control over other devices ("slaves"). As the network runs, each element can lose and gain master status, based on negotiations with other members of the network. Note: If the VME Bus extension does not appear in the Active Extensions panel, it is not a valid extension for the current controller type.
Editing the VME Bus Extension
In the Active Extensions panel select the VME Bus extension, then:
Step 1 Action Enter the appropriate value in the Slave Interrupt Level field. Boards on a VME Bus can send and respond to messages on seven interrupt levels, numbered from 1 to 7. This field determines which interrupt level the board uses when its acting as a slave. Enter a value between 1 and 255 in the Status ID field. When the VME controller receives an interrupt while acting as a slave, this is the value it sends. Select an appropriate value for master arbitration type from the Master Arbitration Type drop-down list. This field determines how the controller will operate. Valid settings are Not System Controller, Primary Mode (PRI) or Round Robin Mode (RRS). Select an appropriate value for master release mode from the Master Release Mode drop-down list. This field determines when a board acting as a master relinquishes its master status. Valid settings are Release on Request (ROR), Release When Done (RWD), Release On Clear (ROC), or Bus Capture and Hold (BCAP). The proper setting depends on how your Quantum network is configured. Select the appropriate value for master VME Bus request level from the Master Bus Request Level drop-down list. This field determines what priority the board has when trying to acquire master status. It can range from BR0 (the lowest) to BR3 (the highest). For each interrupt level from Interrupt 1 to Interrupt 7, select whether it should be Enabled or Disabled. These fields will only have an effect when the VME acts as a master. If an interrupt level is: l Enabled - The controller responds to any messages sent on that interrupt. l Disabled - The controller ignores them.
2 3
126
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Using the Logic Editor
At a Glance
Logic Editor Overview The Logic Editor is used to view and/or edit ladder logic in Offline, Online or Emulation mode. In Offline mode, network logic is loaded into the Logic Editor from the database when it is opened. In Online mode, network logic is read from the PLC one network at a time. In Emulation mode the power flow is simulated using the network logic loaded from the project.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
127

Topic Logic Editor Overview Logic Editor Properties Hotkey Template Using the Logic Editor Working with Networks Instructions Working with Addresses Configurable Mnemonics ISA Symbols Diagnostic Trace Sweep (Online Only) Setting Bookmarks in Logic Hardware Clock Segment Scheduler Equation Networks Mathematical Equations in Equation Networks Mathematical Operations in Equation Networks Mathematical Functions in Equation Networks Page 129 130 132 135 138 140 142 144 146 148 149 151 152 153 154 156 158 161
128
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Logic Editor Overview

Overview The Logic Editor is used to enter logic elements, display input/output data, and add descriptors and force discretes. The Logic Editor shows project ladder logic in either Offline, Online, Combined or Emulation mode. In Offline mode, network logic is loaded into the Logic Editor from the project when the editor is opened. In Online and Combined mode, network logic is read from the PLC one network at a time. During idle states of Online mode, networks around the currently displayed network may be cached for faster access to the networks. The logic editor is made up of four panels:
Panel Network Navigator panel Logic Editor panel Description The Network Navigator Panel (tree) is used to navigate through networks and segments. To display or hide the Network Navigator Panel, select View Navigation Tree from the logic editor right-click menu. The Logic Panel contains the view of the logic contained in the currently viewed network. The title of the Logic Panel contains the current network, maximum network and the page title for the network. In Online and Emulation mode, powerflow will be drawn per cell based on the properties of the Logic Editor. The cursor tracks several features: instruction help placed in Tracking Help window, tracking documentation for the current address in Documentation editor and data for the current network. The Instructions Panel contains a list of all available instructions for the current project. New instructions are entered by dragging from the Instructions Panel and dropping into the Logic Panel. The list of instructions is alphabetically sorted. To display or hide the Instructions Panel, select View Instruction List from the logic editor right-click menu. The Properties Panel contains information about the current cell the cursor is on. Depending on the type of cell, the Properties Panel will contain a 1, 2 or 3 high instruction. For a blank cell, the Properties Panel will contain only the name property. To display or hide the Properties Panel, select View Properties from the logic editor right-click menu.
Instructions panel
Properties Panel
Note: The instructions, properties and networks panels can be opened or closed using the right-click menu in the logic panel. Select View Instruction List or Properties or Navigation Tree..
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
129
Logic Editor Properties

Customizing the Logic Editor Display The Logic properties dialog box tells ProWORX 32 how to display each cell in a network. In the project navigation tree:
Step 1 2 3 4 Action Right click the Logic icon. Select Properties from the right-click menu. Configure the logic editor properties as desired. See Logic Editor Display Properties. Click OK to save and apply changes.
Logic Editor Display Properties
In the logic editor properties window:

Property Description
Color The color of the descriptor, symbol, data, back reference, cursor background, Configuration cursor foreground, logic background, logic foreground, and power flow is user defined. Click the color box beside the text and select a color from the Color dialog box. To set the colors to their defaults, click the Default button. This will also set the power flow line width to three. Power Flow Line Width Display Settings In Emulation or Online mode, the power line shows the flow of power. You can adjust the width of this line from 1 to 6. Up to seven lines are available for each element: Five lines above the instruction and two below it. For each line, select one of the following: l Clear - This line is not displayed. l Address - The address associated with the cell is displayed. l Descriptor (1 - 9) - Descriptors specified in the documentation editor are displayed. l Symbol (1,2) - Symbols specified in the documentation editor are displayed. l Data - The addresses data is displayed. l Back Ref - Back referencing information is displayed. l Blank - This line is blank. Select the column width for the seven lines of cell description. Increasing the width allows less instructions to fit on the screen, but more descriptor, data and symbol information to be displayed. Check the check box to always see the full grid of instructions in the window. If the check box is unchecked, the cells will be displayed at full size and you will have to scroll to see the entire network.
Column Width Always Fit 7 Rows x 11 Cols
130
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Property
Description
Show Coils in Check the check box to see the coils where they are solved by the controller. Solve Column If the check box is unchecked, the coils will always be displayed in the 11th column attached to the solve column by dots. Multi Function When checked, function identifier constants are replaced with four-letter Naming descriptions of the function operation. Confirm Overwrites Multi Instruction Insert Confirm Deletes Use Insert/ Delete Key Menus Show Cross Reference Tips ISA Symbols You are prompted to confirm each time you overwrite an existing ladder logic instruction with a new one. This security feature is useful when working online. When checked, you can add as many instruction as you want without specifying an associated address. You are prompted to confirm each time you try to delete an instruction from ladder logic. Use this function to protect your ladder logic, especially while working online. When checked, you can access the Insert menu by pressing the INSERT key and the Delete menu by pressing the DELETE key. When cleared, these keys operate normally and the menus are only accessible from the Edit menu. When checked, a tooltip will be visible showing the cross reference information for the address that your cursor is hovered over. The tooltip is in the format network.row.instruction. When checked, enables the use of ISA symbols in the logic view.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
131
Hotkey Template
Overview The hotkey template is used to select the type of hotkey support that you wish to use. The possible options are ProWORX 32, ProWORXPLUS, or Modsoft. The following table lists the supported hotkeys for Modsoft and ProWORXPLUS. From the My Computer (in the Navigation panel), right-click menu:
Step 1 2 3 4 Action Select Properties. The Properties dialog appears. Select the Logic tab. From the Hotkey Template drop-down, select the template you want to use. (ProWORX 32 (default), ProWORXPlus, or Modsoft. Click OK to save the changes and exit the Properties dialog.
Changing the Hotkey Template
132
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Modsoft Hotkey Listing
Modsoft Hotkey Listing:

Hotkey ALT+F2 ALT+F3 ALT+F4 ALT+F5 ALT+F6 ALT+F7 ALT+A ALT+B ALT+D ALT+I ALT+L ALT+M ALT+N ALT+P ALT+T ALT+V ALT+Z CTRL+PgUp CTRL+PgDn CTRL+Home CTRL+End CTRL+F8 Operation Invoke RDE Copy Delete Paste Offset Search Append Network Retrace Delete Network Insert Network Before Latched Coil Retentive Coil Negative Transitional Positive Transitional Trace Vertical Short DX-Zoom Previous Segment Next Segment Goto 1st Network of Segment Goto Last Network of Segment Configuration Register Editor Locate Coil Insert Previous Network Insert Previous Network Block Paste Replace ProWORX 32 Equivalent Data Watch Window Block Copy
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
133
ProWORXPLUS Hotkey Listing
ProWORXPLUS Hotkey Listing:

Hotkey ALT+A ALT+C ALT+G ALT+H ALT+J ALT+L ALT+O ALT+R ALT+S ALT+T ALT+U ALT+X ALT+Z CTRL+D CTRL+T CTRL+U Operation Address Used Coil Rebuild (Offline), Coil Column (Online) Global Addressiing Help Jump to Mark Log Book Locate Coil Register Editor Search Trace (Online) Undo Mark Location and Exit Retrace Network Display Setup Terminal Block Search Unlink All Macros Logic Properties Replace ProWORX 32 Equivalent
134
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002

Editing Overview The level to which you can edit in the logic editor is set in the client security settings. For more information see ProWORX 32 Client Security, p. 20, User Rights. Offline Edit Mode lets you make changes (e.g., entering instructions with undefined addresses or duplicate coils) to network logic in the online logic editor without updating the controller in real-time. From the logic editor right-click menu:
Step 1 Action Select Edit Offline Edit Mode. While you are in Offline Edit Mode, the network appears in bright blue, with no power flow or state flow shown. The status bar will display "Offline Edit Mode" in bright blue. As long as you are in the Offline Edit Mode, changes made to the network wont be sent to the controller. Instead, they will be kept in a temporary buffer until you exit the Offline Edit Mode or change networks.
Offline Edit Mode Overview
Switching to Offline Edit Mode
Editing Logic in Offline Edit Mode
In the logic editor:

Step 1 Action Use the same editing conventions and procedures as the ProWORX 32 Offline editor does. Remember, however, that you cannot edit more than one network without either cancelling the edit or writing the edit to the controller.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
135
Exiting Offline Edit Mode
From the logic editor right-click menu:

Step 1 Action Select Edit Offline Edit Mode. -orSelect Edit Save Network. (Only visible when in offline network mode.) -orExit the logic editor. You are then prompted about writing your changes to the controller:
l l
Undoing and Redoing Edits
Yes: ProWORX 32 checks the new network for undefined addresses and duplicate coils. If none are found, ProWORX 32 deletes the original network in the controller, and sends the new network (created in Offline Mode) to the controller. No: Returns to regular logic editor. Cancel: Returns to Offline Edit Mode.
Use the undo/redo feature to reverse or reapply up to 10 actions.
Note: If you receive the messages "Undo information not recognized, clearing undo/ redo information", a possible cause could be the register ranges that are set for the PRWX loadable are being overwritten by theTraffic Cop, Peer Cop, MSTR, or other instruction addresses that are already used. Search for address conflicts with the Used Address feature, see Address Used, p. 60.
To Undo/Redo an Edit
From the logic editor, right-click menu:

Step 1 2 3 Action Select Edit Undo or Edit Redo. The Undo/Redo Stack dialog appears. Click in the list where you want the starting point of the actions redone/undone. The rows (actions) above the selected action are also selected. Click OK to undo or redo the selected actions.
136
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Undoing/ Redoing Online
While working online, the undo/redo feature only works when:
l The property Online Multiple Undo/Redo Enabled is selected. See Logic Editor l The PRWX MSL loadable is added to your controller and is in the logic. l You use a running controller that supports this feature.
Online undo/redo is supported by the following controllers:
984-685E 984-785E 984-785L 984-AT4 All Quantums 984-VM4 Compact A120 Series Compact TSX Atrium
Properties, p. 130 for more information.
Adding the PRWX MSL Loadable
After the Online Multiple Undo/Redo Enabled property is enabled:

Step 1 2 3 4 Action Attach to a valid controller. The Add PRWX Loadable dialog box appears. In the Command field, type an unused register to be used by ProWORX 32 to control the loadable. In the Table field, type an unused register of a starting range (4yyyy to 4yyyy+150) to used by ProWORX 32 to transfer data into the loadable. In the Network field, type a value between one and the maximum number of networks in the device. This number represents the network location to be created and where the PRWX instruction will be placed. Up to 5000 networks can be defined.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
137
Working with Networks

Overview A ladder logic network contains a 7x11 celled grid. Network logic is solved from leftto-right, top-to-bottom. In the logic editor:
Step 1 2 3 Action To insert a network into a blank segment, select Insert Network from the Network Navigator panel right-click menu. To insert a network after the current network, select Insert Next Network from the Network Editor right-click menu. To insert a network previous to the current network, select Insert Previous Network from the Network Editor right-click menu.
Inserting Networks
Moving Networks
You can move or copy networks within or between segments and within or between projects by using the standard Cut, Copy, and Paste functions. Theses functions can be selected from the Network Navigator right-click menu, or from the ProWORX 32 toolbar. From the logic editor right-click menu:
Step 1 Action Select Delete Network. The current network is deleted and the any remaining networks are shifted up one network.
Deleting Networks
Working with Network Rows and Columns

Step 1 Action To insert a row or column, select Insert Row (or) Column from the logic editor right-click menu. You can only insert a row or column if it does not make the network invalid. Inserting a column shifts existing columns to the right. Inserting a row shifts existing rows down. To delete a row or column, select Delete Row (or) Column from the logic editor right-click menu. You can only delete a row or column if it does not make the network invalid. Deleting a column shifts existing columns to the left. Deleting a row shifts existing rows up.
138
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Initializing Logic

Step 1 Action To initialize logic (delete all existing logic and networks from the current project), select Initialize Logic from the loigc editor right-click menu.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
139
Instructions
Overview The Instruction Panel contains all available logic instructions. You can use the instruction list to drag and drop instructions into logic. From the logic editor right-click menu:
Step 1 Action Select View Instruction List.
Displaying the Instruction List
Adding an Instruction to a Network
From the instruction panel:

Step 1 2 Action You can drag-and-drop instructions from the instruction to any point in logic. You can also add an instruction to the cell that the cursor is currently on, by selecting an instruction from the Instructions Toolbar.
Moving Instructions
You can move or copy instructions within or between networks and within or between projects by using the standard Cut, Copy, and Paste functions. Theses functions can be selected from the Logic Editor right-click menu, Edit, or from the ProWORX 32 toolbar. To find all like instructions in ladder logic:
Step 1 2 Action Set the logic editor cursor to the bottom node of the instruction that you want to search for. Select Search Instruction Search from the logic editor right-click menu. E.g. To find all ADD instructions in logic, set your cursor to the bottom node of an ADD instruction anywhere in logic and select Instruction Search. All instructions found are listed in the Search Results window in the format InstructionName.Network.Row.Column. To go to an instruction in the Logic Editor, double-click the desired instruction in the Search Results window.
Finding Instructions
3 4
140
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Deleting an Instruction from a Network
From the logic editor:

Step 1 Action Select the instruction that you want to delete and press DELETE.
Configuring an Instruction
In the properties panel:

Step 1 2 3 Action Select the property you want to configure. Enter an appropriate value. Press ENTER to update the instructions properties.
Instruction Properties
Property descriptions:
Property Top Type Top Offset Mid Type Mid Offset Bottom Type Bottom Offset Name Description Top node address type. Top node address. Middle node address type. Middle node address. Bottom node address type. Bottom node address. Instruction name.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
141
Working with Addresses

Editing Addresses in Ladder Logic In the logic editor:
Step 1 2 3 4 Action To edit a single address, double-click the cell that contains the address you want to edit. Type the new address in the cell and press ENTER to save the changes. You can also change the address by using the Properties panel and changing the Type and Offset values for any given cell. To edit a batch of addresses across networks, select Search Replace. Enter the address to replace in the Find What field and the address that is to replace it in the Replace With field, and select Replace. The logic Replace dialog appears. Click Find Next to find an instance of the source address. If you want to replace the address, click Replace. If not, click Find Next again, and so on. If you simply want to replace all addresses, click Replace All.
Finding Addresses in Ladder Logic

Step 1 2 3 4 5 Action To find a specific address, select Search Find (CTRL+F). Enter the address you want to search for in the Find What field. Click Find Next to find the address in logic. To find all like addresses in ladder logic, set the logic editor cursor to a cell that contains the address that you want to search for. Select Search Address Search from the logic editor right-click menu. E.g. To find all 10001 addresses in logic, set your cursor to a cell containing the address 10001 and select Address Search. All Addresses found are listed in the Search Results window in the format InstructionName.Network.Row.Column. To go to an address in the Logic Editor, double-click the desired address in the Search Results window.
6 7
142
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Tracking Ladder Logic Addresses in the Data Watch Window
From the logic editor right-click menu:

Step 1 2 3 4 Action To track the address at the cursor, select Data Add Watch (CTRL+W) or select Data Track Address. To track all addresses in an instruction, select Data Track Instruction. To track all addresses in a network, select Data Track Network. To track all discrete addresses in a network, select Data Track Discrete.
Disabling and Forcing Discretes
You can force a discrete to the ON or OFF state. This removes control of the discrete from logic: it remains in the fixed state until the force is removed. Enabling a discrete removes the Disabled On or Disabled Off, placing control of the discrete back in logic.
Step 1 2 3 Action To force discretes in a network ON, select Data Disable On (CTRL+S) from the logic editor right-click menu. To force discretes in a network OFF, select Data Disable Off (CTRL+D) from the logic editor right-click menu. To return control of a discretes state back to logic, select Data Enable (CTRL+E) from the logic editor right-click menu.
Using Addresses from the Documentation Editor
In the Documentation Editor, summary view:

Step 1 Action Select an address and drag-and-drop it into any instruction in logic or any address property in the properties panel.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
143
Configurable Mnemonics
Overview In ProWORX 32, all instruction mnemonics are configurable, so you can use mnemonics you are already familiar with. From the project right-click menu in the Navigation panel:
Step 1 2 3 4 Action Select Properties. Select the mnemonic to edit and click Edit or double-click the mnemonic to edit. Type in the new mnemonic. Click outside of the field or press ENTER. Note: If you try to type an existing mnemonic, ProWORX 32 reverts to the old mnemonic. Click OK.
Editing a Mnemonic
Mnemonics Listing
Mnemonic descriptions:
Mnemonic NO NC PTC NTC VTO VTS HSH CNR CR SKP UCT DCT T1 T0 T. ADD SUB MUL Description -] [-]\[-]P[-]N[| OPEN | SHRT -SHRT -()-(L)SKP UCTR DCTR T1.0 T0.1 T.01 ADD SUB MULT Normally Open Normally Closed Off to On On to Off Vertical Open Vertical Shunt Horizontal Shunt Normal Coil Latched Coil Skip Function Up Counter Down Counter Timer (seconds) Timer (tenths) Timer (hundredths) Addition Subtraction Multiplication
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
144
Mnemonic DIV RT TR TT BLK FIN FOU SRC STA AND OR CMP SEN MBI COM XOR BRO
Description DIV R->T T->R T->T BLKM FIN FOUT SRCH STAT AND OR CMPR SENS MBIT COMP XOR BROT Division Register to Table Table to Register Table to Table Block Move First-In First-Out Table Search System Status Logical And Inclusive Or Logical Compare Logical Bit Sense Logical Bit Modify Logical Complement Exclusive Or Logical Bit Rotate
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
145
ISA Symbols
Overview If the ISA Symbol Name field in the project is set up to support discrete addresses, the network editor draws the ISA symbol instead of the ladder logic instruction. From the logic editor:
Step 1 2 Action Select a discrete device. Enter an ISA symbol name in the ISA Symbol field in the Documentation Editor.
Attaching an ISA Symbol to a Discrete Device
ISA Symbol Reference
ISA Symbols:
Symbol CRNC Diagram Symbol PBNC Diagram
CRNO
PBNO
FLSNC
PRSNC
FLSNO
PRSNO
FSNC
PSNC
FSNO
PSNO
146
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Symbol LSNC
Diagram
Symbol SOL
Diagram
LSNO
TASN
LTG
TASNC
LTR
TGSN
HORN
TGSNO
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
147
Diagnostic Trace
Overview The Diagnostic Trace feature is a very powerful search mechanism. It is used to find dependencies of a particular output (0xxxx). A search is performed to find the destination point. Then each network is searched to find dependencies of the output address. Each network is then searched to find dependencies of these dependencies. Use Diagnostic Trace to isolate problems relating to a specific output. For instance, if an output is off when it should be on, the Diagnostic Trace will search through logic to determine which addresses affect its state. From the right-click menu in the logic panel:
Step 1 2 Action Make sure that the address you want to trace is selected and click Search Diagnostic Trace. To move to an addresses cross reference, select the cross reference from the address drop-down box. The logic editor moves to the selected network, row, and column.
Why Use Diagnostic Trace? Using Diagnostic Trace
Analyzing Diagnostic Trace Results
The Diagnostic Trace window shows the output address on the right side of the window. The column to the left is all the dependencies of the output address. The next column is all the dependencies of the dependencies. Address color scheme:
Color Red Yellow Green Description This address is likely to be the source of the problem. This address could be related to the problem. This address is not likely to be the source of the problem.
Note: To update the ladder logic cross references, select Update Cross References from the logic editor right-click menu.
148
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Sweep (Online Only)

Overview The Sweep function is a powerful diagnostic tool that lets you solve logic for a set number of scans or solve logic continuously with a constant time between scans. The Constant Sweep mode sets the controller to scan and solve logic and update I/ O continuously, but with a constant time interval between scans. If the actual scan time is less than the imposed scan time, the controller waits for the imposed scan time to elapse before performing the next scan. If the actual scan time is more than the imposed scan time, the controller finishes the scan, then continues on with the next scan. This lets you slow the scan time to when debugging logic, so that the controller doesnt solve logic too quickly for you to catch errors. From the networks panel (tree), right click menu:
Step 1 2 3 4 Action Select Sweep. In the Sweep Mode area, select the Constant Sweep radio button. Enter the target time (in 10s of milliseconds) for each scan in the Time box. Enter a 4xxxx register to hold the target time value in the Register (4xxxx) box. The actual time taken for each scan is placed in the next register, so a total of two registers are used. Click OK.
Constant Sweep Mode
Performing a Constant Sweep
Single Sweep
Single Sweep mode sets the controller to scan and solve logic, and update I/O for a set number of scans only. When the sweep is finished, the controller stops solving logic and updating I/O, waits until you manually trigger the sweep. WARNING Ensure hardware not part of critical process. The Single Sweep function should not be used to debug controls on machine tools, processes, or material handling systems when they are active. Once the set number of scans is solved, all outputs are frozen in their last state. Since no logic solving is occurring, all input information is ignored. This can result in unsafe, hazardous, and destructive operation of the machine or process connected to the controller. Failure to follow this precaution can result in severe injury or equipment damage.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
149
Performing a Single Sweep
From the networks panel (tree), right click menu:

Step 1 2 3 Action Select Sweep. In the Sweep Mode area, select the Single Sweep radio button. Enter the target time (in 10s of milliseconds) for each scan in the Time box. Note: If the actual scan takes less time than the target scan time, the controller waits for the target scan time to elapse before performing the next scan. If the actual scan takes more time than the target scan time, the controller finishes the scan, then continues on with the next scan. This lets you force the scan time to a higher rate when debugging logic that the controller may solve too quickly to otherwise catch. Enter the number of scans (1-15) to be performed during the sweep the Scans box. Click OK. When you are ready to perform the sweep, select Sweep from the networks panel (tree) right click menu.
4 5 6 7
l l l
Select one of the following radio buttons: Invoke: Select to start the sweep. Trigger: Select to set a trigger for the sweep. Turn Off: Select to shut off the sweep.
Click OK. The controller performs the scans (unless you selected Turn Off), then stops solving logic with all outputs frozen in their last state. You can then browse register contents and perform other diagnostics using this "snapshot" of the solving process.
150
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Setting Bookmarks in Logic

Overview You can set bookmarks in your network logic so you can quickly return to a cell or series of cells. The Mark and Goto Marks functions allow quick viewing of nonconsecutive areas of logic. By marking multiple cell locations on different networks, you can use the mark table to quickly jump between the marked locations. In the logic editor:
Step 1 2 Action Set the cursor to the cell that you want to mark. Select Search Mark from the right-click menu. The cell is added to the Bookmark Table.
Setting a Mark in Logic
Going to a Marked Cell

Step 1 2 Action From the right-click menu, select Search Goto Mark. The Goto Mark dialog appears. Select the mark you want to go to from the list and click Goto.
Deleting a Bookmark

Step 1 2 Action From the right-click menu, select Search Goto Mark. The Goto Mark dialog appears. Select the mark you want to delete from the list and click Delete.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
151
Hardware Clock
Overview Many controllers have a built-in Time of Day clock. You can set these clocks if the controllers starting register is configured in Configuration (see General Tab Parameters, p. 77), you have the necessary rights, and the controller is running. From the network tree right-click menu:
Step 1 2 3 Action Select Hardware Clock. The Hardware Clock dialog appears. In the First Day of Week drop-down list box, select the day the controller will use as the first day of the week. Do one of the following: To synchronize the controllers date and time with your computer, click Auto Set. l Type the date in mm-dd-yy format in the Controller Date box. Type the time in hh-mm-ss format in the Controller Time box.
Configuring the Hardware Clock
Click OK
Hardware Clock Registers
The time of day clock requires eight 4xxxx registers in your controller:
Register 4xxxx Content
l l l l
Controller Information. From the left: Bit 1: Set Clock Values Bit 2: Read Clock Values Bit 3: Done Bit 4: Errors
4xxxx + 1 4xxxx + 2 4xxxx + 3 4xxxx + 4 4xxxx + 5 4xxxx + 6 4xxxx + 7
Day of week (from 1 to 7) Month Day Year Hour (in 24-hour format) Minutes Seconds
152
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Segment Scheduler
Overview The Segment Scheduler governs when each segment of logic is solved and controls which I/O drops are updated after each segment is solved. The number of segments in the project is set in the Configuration editor. By default, the segments are solved in numerical order (segment one first, segment two next, and so on). Using the Segment Scheduler In the Networks panel right-click menu:
Step 1 2 3 Action Select Segment Scheduler. Edit the fields in the Segment Scheduler dialog. Select the control input: Continuous: Sets the segment in this row to be solved every scan. Set Control: Sets the segment to be solved only when a discrete address is in a specific state. If you select Set Control, you must also: l Type the discrete address in the Address field, which controls whether the segment in this row is to be solved. l Select whether the segment in this row is to be solved when the control discrete is On or Off. l Watchdog Timer Reset: Inserts a Watchdog Timer.
l l
4 5 6
Select the segment from the drop down list. Select the input drop associated with the segment in this row during the solve from the drop down box. Select the output drop associated with the segment in this row during the solve from the drop down box. For S901 projects/controllers the Drop In is replaced with Chan In and Drop Out is replaced with Chan Out. Click OK.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
153
Equation Networks
Overview An Equation Network provides an easy way to program complex math functions, with values stored in register locations. Equations in an Equation Network are presented in a regular, left-to-right format, technically known as "infix" notation. You program Equation Networks and set its enable contact and output coil(s) in the Equation Network Editor. Equation Networks were introduced in Quantum Rev. 2 controllers; not all controllers support Equation Networks. The easiest way to see if your controller supports Equation Networks is by trying to create a new oneif your controller doesnt support it, the Equation Network option on the right-click Insert menu wont be available. Creating an Equation Network In the Network Navigation panel:
Step 1 2 Action Select the network where you want to insert the equation network. From the right click menu in the logic editor select Insert Equation Network. An equation network occupies a whole network, regardless of the contents of the equation network.
Using the Equation Network
In the Properties panel:

Step 1 2 3 Action Select an input type from the Input Type drop-down list. Enter the input offset in the Input Offset property Set the register address for the output coils. You can enter either the direct address (in X:Y numeric format) or a symbolic address. You can also insert addresses from the Symbols list panel, Used Register Address table and the Descriptor Summary.See below for coil descriptions. Enter an equation into the network by selecting the ellipsis box in the Equation property or double-clicking anywhere in the Equation Editor Network. The Equation Editor dialog appears.
154
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Coil Descriptions
Coil descriptions:
Coil Solved OK < Coil = Coil > Coil Error Coil Description Solved OK is set when the equation is being solved without errors. Result<0 is set when the equation result is less than zero. Result=0 is set when the equation result is equal to zero. Result>0 is set when the equation result is greater than zero. Error is set when errors have occurred while solving the equation. While online, if the Error coil receives power, an error message will appear under the coil describing the error.
Note: If you dont want to use a particular output coil, leave the address for that coil blank (or erase one already typed in). That coil will not be included in the Equation Network.
Setting up an Enable Contact
An Equation Networks enable contact, when set, activates the Equation Network. If an enable contact passes current, the Equation Network will be solved. You change settings for the enable contact in the Enable Editor display. To select a type for the enable contact, select the symbol of the enable contact that corresponds with your chosen type. An enable contact can be a normally-open contact, normally-closed contact, horizontal short, or a horizontal open. To select a register address for the enable contact, in the Enable Contact address field, type the direct address (in X:Y numeric format) or symbolic address for the enable contact coil. This field is only available if the enable contact type is a normally-open or normally closed contact.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
155
Mathematical Equations in Equation Networks

Equation Format ProWORX 32 expects equation elements to appear in a specific format. Operations and functions each have their own format. Also, for each value, you must specify what kind of value it is (register address, constant or symbol) and its data type (signed integer, unsigned integer, etc.). Each value can refer to a constant, register address or symbol. The Equation Network Editor determines which data type the value is, based on the following format.
Format Default (no # sign or single quotes Prefixed by # Enclosed in single quotes Meaning Register address Constant Symbol Example 40001 #123 HEIGHT
Equation Values and Data Types
The actual data type of a value is determined by its suffix, as shown in the following table:
Suffix None U L UL F Meaning 16-bit Integer 16-bit unsigned Integer Long (32-bit) signed Integer Long (32-bit) unsigned Integer 32-bit floating point (real) Example #38 40001U #-123L HEIGHTUL #+1.45E-4F
Typically, youd first indicate the register address where the calculated result is to be stored, followed by an equal sign (the "assignment operator"), followed by the calculation itself. For example: 40001 = 40002U + COS(40003UL) * #+1.35E-4F / HEIGHTL
l 40002U is an address of a 16-bit unsigned integer. l COS(40003UL) calculates the cosine of a long (32-bit) unsigned integer value l #+1.35E-4F is the floating point value of 0.000145, given in exponential notation. l HEIGHTL is a symbol of the name HEIGHT, representing the address of a long l 40001 = indicates that the result of the calculation is to be stored in register
address 40001 as a 16-bit signed integer. (32-bit) signed integer. stored at address 40003.
156
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Everything to the right of the assignment operator also constitutes an expression. An expression is any part of an equation that can be evaluated to a single value. This can be a single constant or register address, or a complete mathematical operation. For example, #35 is an expression, as are LOG(#10) and 40002U + COS(40003UL). Complex expressions can contain other expressions within them, as in #3 * (40002U + COS(40003UL)). For the most part, any operator or function can be performed on any expression, no matter how complex. Note: It is good programming practice to enclose all expressions in parentheses, even when theyre not actually needed. This makes the equation easier to read and ensures that operations in an equation are solved in the correct order.
Exponential Notation
Floating point numbers are normally specified in exponential notation, as in: +1.34E-4 This represents 1.35 times 10 to the -4th power, or 1.35 times 0.0001. Thus, we would shift the decimal place four places to the left to get 0.000135. The "-4" part is called the exponent (note the preceding "E") and can be a positive or negative number. In the Equation Network Editor, you must also indicate:
l That these numbers are constants; and l Their data types. For example, integers or floating point numbers.
The default data type is unsigned 16-bit integer. So, since the above value is a fraction (and therefore must be a floating point number), it would have to appear as #+1.35E-4F. With no data type suffix, numbers in exponential notation are assumed to be integers. For example, #+1.35E+2 represents the unsigned 16-bit integer value 135. Exponential notation is particularly useful for very large integers.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
157
Mathematical Operations in Equation Networks

Mathematical Operations The following table lists the mathematical operations you can include in your equation:
Type Operator Result Assignment
= Assignment operator The assignment operator = is used to assign a storage place for the results of the equation. All equations will use the assignment operator. The format is: ADDRESS = EXPRESSION Where ADDRESS is a valid register address and EXPRESSION is a valid value or expression assigned to the address. Unary Operators "Unary" means "single", so unary operators are used on only one value. ~ The unary operator is placed just before the value or expression to which it is applied. For example, (30002) returns -1 times the number stored at address 30002. Exponentiation operator Takes values to a specified power. 40001**3 returns the (integer) value stored at 40001, taken to the third power. Arithmetic operators These require two values, one before and one after the operator. These values can be any valid expression. For example, #4 * 40003 results in four multiplied by the value stored at address 40003. **
Negation. The result is -1 times the value. Ones complement. This works on the binary representation of a value: all 1s are changed to 0s and vice versa.
Exponentiation
* / + -
Multiplication Division Addition Subtraction
158
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Type Bitwise operators Bitwise operators work on binary (base 2) representations of values.
Operator &
Result AND. The single bit result of an AND operation is only true (1) if both bits are set to 1. OR. The single bit result of an OR operation is true (1) if either bit is set to 1. The result is false (0) only if both bits are set to 0. XOR. Short for "Exclusive OR". The single bit result of an XOR operation is false (0) if both bits are the same, true (1) otherwise. Left Shift. The result of 40001<<#2 is the binary representation of the number stored at 40001 shifted left two (#2) places. Zeros are added on the right to fill in the gap. Right Shift. The result of 40001>>#2 is the binary representation of the number stored at 40001 shifted right two (#2) places. Zeros are added on the left to fill in the gap. Less than. Less than or equal to. Equal to. Not equal. Greater than or equal to. Greater than. Used in conditional expression.
| In the case of AND, OR and XOR, the computer applies the operator to each digit in the two values: 010 XOR 011 (2 XOR 3 in decimal ^ numbers) results in 001 (1 in decimal). In the case of shifting operators, the computer shifts all digits in the << binary representation of the number the given number of places to the left or right. Digits on one side of the number are lost, and zeros fill in the blanks on the other side. For example, for 8-bit >> numbers, 77 << 2 means 01001101 shifted left two digits. The binary result is 00110100, or 52 decimal. < <= = <> => > ?: ()
Relational operators These operators describe a comparison between two values or expressions. The result is always true (1) or false (0). For example, #35 <= #42 evaluates to 1 (true). Relational operators are used in Conditional expressions. Conditional operators See below for details. Parentheses Used to set precedence in solving equations. To make sure certain operations are solved before others, enclose those operations in parentheses.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
159
Conditional Expressions
In Equation Networks, conditional expressions take the following form: EXPR1 RELOP (EXPR2) ? (EXPR3) : EXPR4 EXPR1 through EXPR4 can be any address, value or expression. If EXPR2 or EXPR3 are not single values or addresses, they must be enclosed in brackets. RELOP can be any relational operator, such as > (greater than) or <> (not equal to). When solving a conditional expression, the computer first compares EXPR1 and EXPR2, based on the relational operator. If the comparison is true, the value of the conditional expression is the result of EXPR3. If the comparison is false, the value of the conditional expression is EXPR4. Note: It is especially good programming practice to enclose all expressions within a conditional expression in parentheses, even when theyre not actually needed. This makes the equation easier to read and ensures that operations are solved in the correct order.
160
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Mathematical Functions in Equation Networks

Mathematical Functions The following table lists the pre-defined math functions you can include in your equation. Each of these functions takes one argument enclosed in brackets following the function name. The argument can be any valid value or expression. For example, COS(#35+40001) returns the cosine of 35 plus the number stored at address 40001. In this table, X refers to a functions argument (as in "COS(X)").
Function ABS(S) ARCCOS(X) ARCSIN(X) ARCTAN(X) COS(X) COSD(X) EXP(X) FIX(X) FLOAT(X) LN(X) LOG(X) SIN(X) SIND(X) SQRT(X) TAN(X) TAND(X) Description Absolute value of X (i.e. negative numbers become positive). Arc cosine of X radians. Arc sine of X radians. Arc tangent of X radians. Cosine of X radians. Cosine of X degrees. Calculates e (approximately 2.7182818) to the Xth power. Converts floating point number X to an integer. Converts integer X to a floating point number. Natural (base e) logarithm of X. Common (base 10) logarithm of X. Sine of X radians. Sine of X degrees. Square root of X. Tangent of X radians. Tangent of X degrees.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
161
162
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Using the Traffic Cop
At a Glance
Traffic Cop Overview The Traffic Cop is used to visualize and configure I/O series, drops, cards, and slots. Each I/O series (Quantum, Momentum, Symax, Compact A120, Compact TSX 800, 800, 200-500, DCP, S901, 900, Micro, Micro 984) has the same look and feel, although some series have different I/O structures. This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Traffic Cop Overview Working with Drops and Racks Working with Slots Online Module Status I/O Drawing Generator Materials List Page 164 165 167 169 171 172
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
163
Traffic Cop Overview

Overview The Traffic Cop is used to visualize and configure I/O series, drops, cards, and slots. Each I/O series (Quantum, Momentum, Symax, Compact A120, Compact TSX 800, 800, 200-500, DCP, S901, 900, Micro, Micro 984) has the same look and feel, although some series have different I/O structures. The navigation panel shows a text-based representation of the traffic cop. The panel is enabled regardless of which I/O series is selected. The tree provides a hierarchical view of configured drops, racks and slots. Navigate through the tree to select a drop or rack to view or to edit its configuration in the Drop or Slot Properties Panel. Using the tree view you can insert, delete, and move any part of the tree (drops, racks, or slots). The Visual Representation of the I/O system consists of three views:
Navigation Panel (Tree)
Visual Representation
l Drop View - Visual representation of all racks and slots within the selected I/O l Rack View - Visual representation of all slots within the selected rack. Click on l Momentum View - Visual representation of the momentum traffic cop. This
shows only the current branch of I/O. If a new card can be programmed, the last shown card is labelled "AVAILABLE". any slot to access that slots properties in the Slot Properties Panel. drop. Click on any slot to jump to the rack view that contains the selected slot.
Initializing the Traffic Cop
In the traffic cop navigation panel:

Step 1 Right-click the I/O series 2 you want to initialize. Select Initialize from the pop-up menu. Action
WARNING Ensure data integrity. Initializing the traffic cop deletes all drops, racks, and slots, and clears all properties. Failure to follow this precaution can result in severe injury or equipment damage.
164
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Working with Drops and Racks

Drop Properties Panel Lists user-editable and calculated properties pertaining to the selected drop. Available drop properties are:
Property Drop Series Hold-up Time Rack (1-x) ASCII Port Input Bits Output Bits Status Word Read Only To Edit: Select a drop from the available Drop Series drop-down list box. Enter a hold-up time value (3 - 65,535). Select a rack from the rack drop-down list box. (X represents the number of racks available.) Enter an ASCII port value. Read only - number of input bits used within the selected drop. Read only - number of output bits used within the selected drop. Enter a 3xxxx address (holds the status information for the drop). Select TRUE or FALSE from the available drop mode drop-down list box.
Note: Not all properties are available for all drops - i.e. a Quantum drop will not have an ASCII port property.
Working with Drops
In the traffic cop navigation panel, select the drop From the right-click menu:
Function To insert a drop: Action Select Insert. Comment
you want to work with.
Inserting a drop inserts a drop above the selected drop and moves existing drops down. You can edit the currently selected drop at any time by editing properties in the Drop Properties Panel. Clearing a drop clears all racks from the selected drop. Deleting a drop deletes the currently selected drop and moves the remaining drops up.
To edit a drop:
Select Edit.
To clear a drop: To delete a drop:
Select Clear. Select Delete.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
165
Working with Racks
In the traffic cop navigation panel, select the rack From the right-click menu:
Function To insert a rack: Action Select Insert. Comment
Inserting a rack inserts a rack above the selected rack and moves existing racks down. You can edit the currently selected rack at any time by editing the rack property in the Drop Properties Panel. Clearing a rack clears all slots from the selected rack. Deleting a rack deletes the currently selected rack and moves remaining racks up.
To edit a rack:
Select Edit.
To clear a rack: To delete a rack:
Using Cut/Copy/Paste
In the ProWORX 32 traffic cop:

Step 1 Action All items in the traffic cop (heads, drops, racks, and slots) can be cut, copied and pasted. Also, items can be cut, copied, or pasted between different projects traffic cops. From the item right-click menu, select: Cut - Removes the currently selected item (including documentation) from the traffic cop into a buffer. l Copy - Copies the currently selected item (including documentation) from the traffic cop into a buffer. l Paste - Inserts the buffered item (including documentation) into the currently selected Slot/Rack/Drop/Head. Note: A Slot copy can only be pasted into a slot, if the user attempts to paste the slot onto a drop the paste will be ignored. This holds true for any item that is pasted. The I/O series of the paste must match or it is ignored. l Paste Special - The same as paste, but new available addresses are automatically assigned to any slot that is pasted.
166
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Working with Slots

Slot Properties Panel Lists user-editable and calculated properties pertaining to the selected slot. Available slot properties are:
Property Card Name Description Input Reference Input Data Mode Output Reference Output Data Mode Data Length Power Rating Bus Module Count Bypass Local Bus Bypass remote Card Config To Edit: Select a card from the available cards drop-down list box. Read only - description of the selected card. Enter an address type. Only valid entries are accepted. Select a data mode (BIN or BCD) from the data mode drop-down list box. Enter an address type. Only valid entries are accepted. Select a data mode (BIN or BCD) from the data mode drop-down list box. Enter the data length. Read only - power rating of the selected card. Read only - number of modules a Bus Module contains. Select TRUE or FALSE from the bypass local bus drop-down list box. Select TRUE or FALSE from the bypass remote drop-down list box. Displays hex parameter data. To edit, double-click the Card Config property and a Card Config dialog box will open.
Note: Not all properties are available for all slots - i.e. a discrete card will not have the Data Mode property.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
167
Working with Slots
In the traffic cop navigation panel, select the slot From the right-click menu:
Function To insert a slot: Action Select Insert. Comment
Inserting a slot inserts a slot above the selected slot and moves existing slots down. Leaving the Slot Properties Panel without selecting a module while in a Momentum traffic cop will result in the insert being cancelled. You can edit the currently selected slot at any time by editing properties in the Slot Properties Panel. Clearing a slot clears the card from the selected slot. Deleting a slot deletes the currently selected slot and moves remaining slots up.
To edit a slot:
Select Edit.
To clear a slot: To delete a slot:
168
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Online Module Status

PLC Status/ Traffic Cop Functionality Matrix Functionality Matrix:
PLC Status Online Running Read-Only PLC Status Update Method Traffic Cop Functionality Yes Automatically every 3 seconds Online Stopped No Automatically every 5 seconds No Yes Offline No N/A
Online Health Yes Online Module Recognition Data Committed Method No
N/A N/A
N/A
Controller is updated after user verification
Project is automatically updated
Module Status Icon Reference
Online Stopped - Module Recognition:

Icon , , Indicates a slot that is missing or not configured. Indicates that an incorrect slot has been added to the traffic cop. Description Indicates that an associated slot is incorrect or missing.
Online Running - Module Health:

Icon Description Indicates an unhealthy slot.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
169
Adding a Missing Slot
From the traffic cop navigation panel:

Step 1 Double-click the slot that you want to add. (The correct slot will be selected in the Module property combo-box in the Slot Properties Panel.) 2 3 Press ENTER to accept the selected slot. Configure the remaining properties of the selected slot. Action
Fixing an Incorrect Slot
From the traffic cop navigation panel:

Step 1 Double-click the slot 2 3 4 that you want to fix. Select the correct card from the Module property combo-box in the Slot Properties Panel. Press ENTER to accept the selected slot. Configure the remaining properties of the selected slot. Action
170
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
I/O Drawing Generator

Overview The I/O Drawing Generator creates CAD (Computer-Assisted Design) drawings of 800, Micro, Quantum and A120 Traffic Cop series cards. The drawings are saved in .DXF format, which is supported by most CAD programs. From the project right-click menu in the navigation panel:
Step 1 2 3 Action Select Properties. Select the I/O Drawing tab. Enter, or select by clicking Browse, the directory path to store the Symbol, Master, Intermediate, and Final I/O drawings in. The I/O drawings created reside in the selected path in a subdirectory which has the same name as the project the drawings are created from. Select Overwrite Existing Drawings to discard the existing drawings and save the new ones in their place. Select Ignore, Break, or Warn from the Missing Master Drawings options. This property sets how ProWORX 32 reacts when a master drawing is missing while the I/O drawings are being created.
Setting up the I/O Drawing Generator
4 5
Using the I/O Drawing Generator
In the project navigation panel:

Step 1 Action I/O drawings are generated in a two-step process: Intermediate: These drawings are used as a "working" step. Generating a series of Intermediate drawings as you go can save time when it comes to generating the Final drawings. l Final: These drawings are generated based on the corresponding Intermediate drawings.
2 3 4
To generate an intermediate drawing, select I/O Drawing Intermediate Drawings from the Traffic Cop right-click menu. To generate a final drawing, select I/O Drawing Final Drawings from the Traffic Cop right-click menu. To generate both an intermediate and final drawing, select I/O Drawing Both Drawings from the Traffic Cop right-click menu.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
171
Materials List
Overview When you have finished configuring the I/O area of your system, you may want to know what materials are required to create the hardware system as configured. The material list function creates a list of all required materials (as configured) and their associated part numbers. When the materials list is first launched it will generate a list of materials required by the selected project. The materials list will be created from the project if offline or from the controller if online. On a second launch of the materials list the data will be read from the project rather than generated. You can add prices and comments to existing materials as well as add new materials to the list. The materials list can then be printed or saved to HTML, MS Excel or MS Word. Note: The Material List utility makes some assumptions about cabling that should be checked and modified before printing.
Using the Materials List
In the project navigation panel (tree):

Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Action From the traffic cop icon right click menu, select Materials List. Enter up to six lines of text in the Header text box. This text will be displayed at the top of the printed materials list. Add or edit materials in the grid. All fields are editable except Total which is calculated. To regenerate a material list from the controller or project, select Generate from the materials grid right click menu. To inset a row at the current cursor position, select Insert from the materials grid right click menu. To clear the currently selected row, select Clear from the materials grid right click menu. To delete the currently selected row and shuffle the remaining rows up, select Delete from the materials grid right click menu. To save the materials list to another format, select Save As from the materials grid right click menu. To print out the materials list, select Print from the materials grid right click menu. Close the materials list to save the changes.
172
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Cabling Assumptions
Cabling Assumptions:
1 97-5951-000 RG-11/U Coax Cable 1000 ft. reel This is the recommended cable for use as Trunk cable. It can also be used for Drop cabling although it is recommended to use the less expensive: 97-5750-000 RG-6/U Coax Cable 1000 ft. reel for Drop cabling. RG-6/U can also be used for Trunk cabling if the cable run is less than 5000 ft. but is not recommended. If it is used then 52-0488-000 RG-6/U BNC Connectors are used in place of 52-0401-000 RG-11/U F Connectors For cable runs over 8000 ft. up to 15000 ft., CATV cable should be used but is not supplied by Modicon. AS-W801-012 I/O Signal Cable 12 ft. This also comes in 6 ft.-006and 1.5 ft. 002lengths. AS-W804-012 I/O Power Cable to rack with power 12ft. This also comes in 5 ft.005and 1.5 ft. -002 lengths. AS-W802-012 I/O Power Cable to rack no power 12 ft. This is interchangeable with: AS-W808-002/-005/-008 Light-weight cable in 1.5,5 or 8 ft. lengths. -
2 3 4
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
173
174
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Using the Data Watch Window
At a Glance
Data Watch Window Overview The Data Watch Window is used to view and edit register data values for the selected project. The project can be Online, Offline or in Emulation. Live, real time data may be viewed or edited within the Data Watch Window. The data values may be displayed in a number of ways depending on what Data Watch view is active. Several views are available including a Generic Register Editor, a Data Watch/Edit window, a Spreadsheet view, a Trend view, an Instruction view for specific instructions, a Terminal Block view for specific I/O cards and a mini-HMI view. If the preferences are selected, data for Traffic Cop and Network Logic elements are tracked automatically. Data values may also be logged. These values are saved into an external file for future use. Preferences and properties of the Data Watch Window are saved in the project.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
175

Topic Data Watch Window Overview Properties HMI Trend Trend - Mode Functionality Table Track Logic Editor Track Traffic Cop Instruction Editor / Terminal Block Editor Instruction / Terminal Block Editor Display Scripts Display Script Variables Display Script Functions Register Editor PID Tuner DRUM Summary Importing and Exporting Data Watch Window Data Page 177 181 184 188 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 201 202 205 207
176
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Data Watch Window Overview

Overview The watch window is the primary Data Watch Window. You can select any valid address for the current device and view the data for that address. Up to 100 addresses of any type may be entered and tracked. The data may be edited at any time. Register values may be changed and discrete values may be enabled or forced on or off. Addresses are automatically saved on exit and reloaded on entry. Any register data may be viewed or edited with any selected radix type. Available radices are Decimal, Hex, Binary, ASCII, Signed integer, BCD, 32-bit Floating point or 32-bit integer. The bottom status bar will display various information including Status messages, Offline/Online/Emulation state, Running/Stopped state, Trigger info and Clamping info. Adding Addresses to Track in the Data Watch Window In the data watch window:
Step 1 2 3 Action Result
Double-click or press ENTER in the first available Address cell. Insert a valid address into the Address cell. Press ENTER to insert the address, ESC to cancel the entry. The Data and Radix fields are automatically populated if the address exists in the project. You can edit the data or radix of an address by doubleclicking on the cell you want to change.
Clearing Addresses
From the right-click menu:

Step 1 Action Select Clear. Result All addresses are cleared from the Window.
Loading Addresses and Data from a Log File

Step 1 2 Action Select Load. Select a log file and click OK. Result The DataWatch Address Load dialog appears. All addresses from the file are added to the Data Watch Window.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
177
Filling the Data Watch Window with Addresses

Step 1 2 3 Action Select Fill Addresses. Enter an address in the Starting Address box. Enter a numeric value (1 through 100) in the Number of Addresses box. Click OK. Result The Add Addresses dialog appears within the Data Watch Window. This is the first in a range of addresses to be added to the Data Watch Window. This is the length of the range of addresses to be added to the Data Watch window. Addresses specified are added at the current grid location. Existing addresses may be overwritten.
Setting the Radix for Multiple Addresses
In the data watch window:

Step 1 2 3 4 Action Select the radices you want to change. From the right-click menu, select Set Radix. The Set Radices dialog appears within the Data Watch Window. Result
Select a radix from the Radix drop-down list box. Click OK. All selected radices are updated to the specified radix.
Deleting Addresses
In the data watch window:

Step 1 2 3 Action Result
Select the addresses you want to delete. From the right-click menu, select Delete Addresses. Or, Select an address and press DELETE. Selected addresses are deleted. Selected address is deleted.
178
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Jumping to a Specific Address

Step 1 2 3 Action Select Goto Address. Result The Goto Address dialog appears within the Data Watch Window.
Enter an address in the Select an Address to find box. Click OK. The specified address is selected in the Data Watch Window.
Copying Data Values from One Range of Addresses to Another

Step 1 2 3 4 Action Select Data Utilities Copy Data. Enter an address into the Start Address box. Enter an address into the End Address box. Result The Data Utilities dialog appears within the Data Watch Window. The value of this address is the first in the range to be copied. The value of this address is the last in the range to be copied.
Enter an address into the Destination The value of this address is the first to be Address box. copied to in the sequential range of addresses specified. Click OK. Values are copied.
Moving Data Values from One Range of Address to Another

Step 1 2 3 4 Action Select Data Utilities Move Data. Enter an address into the Start Address box. Enter an address into the End Address box. Result The Data Utilities dialog appears within the Data Watch Window. The value of this address is the first in the range to be copied. The value of this address is the last in the range to be copied.
Enter an address into the Destination The value of this address is the first to be Address box. moved to in the sequential range of addresses specified. Click OK. Values are moved.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
179
Filling a Range of Addresses with a Data Value

Step 1 2 3 4 5 Action Select Data Utilities Fill Data. Enter an address into the Start Address box. Enter an address into the End Address box. Enter a numeric value into the Data Value box. Click OK. Result The Data Utilities dialog appears within the Data Watch Window. The value of this address is the first in the range to be filled. The value of this address is the last in the range to be filled. This value is copied into all specified addresses. Address values are set to the specified value.
Searching for a Data Value

Step 1 2 3 Action Result Select Data Utilities Search Data. The Search Data dialog appears within the Data Watch Window. Enter a numeric value into the Data Value box. Click OK. This is the value to be searched for. The address with the specified data value are selected in the Data Watch Window.
180
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Properties
Using the Data Watch Window Properties Dialog In the navigation window:
Step 1 2 3 Action Right-click the Data Watch Window icon. Select Properties from the drop-down list. When you have made your property changes: To save the proerty changes and close the properties window, click OK. To save the property changes and remain in the properties window, click Apply.
Multi Radix View
When the Multi Radix View check box is selected, the Watch Window and the Register Editor are in Multi Radix view. A column is assigned for each selected radix (Hexadecimal, ASCII, Long, Binary, and/or Float) as well as one for Decimal. Each column displays the data value for the given address in the selected format. Radices cannot be edited. When the Multi Radix View check box is not selected, the Watch Window and the Register Editor will be in Single Radix view. Only one radix will be viewable per address. Any radix can be changed.
Changing the View (Single Radix vs. Multi Radix)
In the Data Watch Window Properties dialog:

Step 1 2 3 Action Click the Multi Radix View check box. Select which radices (Hexadecimal (Hex), Binary (Bin), ASCII (Asc), Float, and Long) you would like to view. Click OK to save the changes and return to the Data Watch Window.
Trigger
When the Trigger check box is selected, the value of a specific address is tracked. When the data for this address reaches the specified value, the Data Watch Window begins tracking and/or logging values. The data is not tracked or logged until the condition is met. When the Trigger check box is not selected, the Data Watch Window automatically tracks and/or logs values.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
181
Setting a Trigger Condition

Step 1 2 3 4 5 Action Click the Trigger check box. Enter the address that you would like to track in the Address box. Select the > or < option button. Enter a numeric value in the State box. Click OK to save the changes and return to the Data Watch Window.
Clamps
When the Clamps check box is selected, all data values tracked are forced inside or outside of the range specified. This affects the display only and does not affect the actual data values in the device. This also affects the data sent to the log file. When the Clamps check box is not selected, all data values are displayed as their actual data value.
Setting a Clamp

Step 1 2 3 4 5 Action Click the Clamp check box. Enter a numeric value in the Lo Clamp box. Enter a numeric value in the Hi Clamp box. Select the Capture Inside or Capture Outside option button. Click OK to save the changes and return to the Data Watch Window.
Log File Size Limit Setting the Log File Size Limit
This value places a size limit on the Log file. Once the limit is reached, no further logging will be done. The limit is in Megabytes. In the Data Watch Window Properties dialog:
Step 1 2 Action Enter a numeric value (in Megabytes) in the Max Log File Size box. Click OK to save the changes and return to the Data Watch Window.
182
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Sample Rate
Specifies how often to poll the device for data. The faster the polling is, the more accurate the data is, but the client computers responses will become more sluggish. This rate also affects the rate that data points are logged. The minimum sample rate is one read every sixty minutes, and the maximum sample rate is one read every 25 milliseconds. Note: This is a target sample rate. The actual sample rate may be slower than you specify due to a large amount of data being polled and the capabilities of your machine.
Setting the Sample Rate

Step 1 2 Action Move the Sample Rate slider to the right for a slower sample rate or to the left for a faster sample rate. Click OK to save the changes and return to the Data Watch Window.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
183
HMI
HMI Overview This view displays a simple Human-Machine graphical grid-based workspace. It allows data to be displayed, data values to be entered, discrete controls to be enacted and basic animation to be visualized. Each cell in the grid may have a series of pictures assigned to it. These pictures are selected based on the data value of an address assigned to the cell. Therefore, as the data changes, the pictures will change as well. Animated switches, gauges, meters and similar graphics are available. Setting the Background Color In the Data Watch Window Properties dialog:
Step 1 2 3 4 Action Click the Background Color - Select button. Choose a color from the Color dialog. Click OK to close the Color dialog. Click OK to save the changes and return to the Data Watch Window.
Setting the Number of Rows and Columns

Step 1 2 3 4 Action Enter a numeric value into the Number of Rows box. (Max: 10, Min: 1) Enter a numeric value into the Columns box. (Max: 10, Min: 1) Click OK to close the Color dialog. Click OK to save the changes and return to the Data Watch Window.
Creating Bitmap Files to Associate with Address Values
Use Windows Explorer to:

Step 1 2 Action Ensure all files you want to associate with a cell are in the same directory. Ensure the files you want to associate with a cell are named sequentially Correct: Timer_1.bmp, Timer_2.bmp, Timer_3.bmp,... Timer_10.bmp Incorrect: Timer.bmp, TTwo.bmp, TimerThree.bmp,... Time10.bmp Tip: The easiest way to name bitmaps for use in the HMI is to use the BitmapName_#.bmp format.
184
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Editing Cell Data

Step 1 2 3 4 Action Select Edit Data. Enter a value in the Picture box. (This will update the value of the address associated with the picture.) Enter a value in the Monitor box. (This will update the value of the address being monitored.) Press OK to save changes.
Associating a Picture with an Address Value

Step 1 2 3 4 Action Select Edit Cell. Select the Picture Enabled check box. Enter an address into the Address box. Select from the Stretch Picture drop-down list box how you would like the pictures to be displayed. (Selecting None will trim the bottom and the right-side of the picture to fit, selecting Fit Cell will make the entire picture fit the cell, selecting Fit Width will trim the bottom of the picture, and selecting Fit Height will trim the right-side of the picture.)
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
185
Associating a Picture with an Address Value (continued)
After entering an address to associate a picture with:

If... Step Action Click Off Picture Browse and select a bitmap (.bmp file) to view when the value of the selected address is 0 (zero). Click On Picture Browse and select a bitmap (.bmp file) to view when the value of the selected address is not 0 (zero). Press OK to save changes. Click Picture Browse and select the first bitmap (.bmp) in a numbered sequence of bitmaps. Enter a number in the Actual Range boxes. (These are the low and high data values you expect or know the address will hold.) Enter a number in the # of Pictures box. (This number will be used to associate different sequentially named pictures with values from the selected address.) E.g. If you enter as an actual range the values 0 and 999, then enter 10 into the # of pictures box, Picture1.bmp (the picture you selected in step 1) will be associated with values 1 through 99, Picture2.bmp will be associated with values 100 through 199, and so on. Press OK to save changes.
you have entered a 1 discrete address (0xxxx or 1xxxx) 2
3 you have entered an analog address (3xxxx or 4xxxx): 1 2
Note: A maximum of 100 pictures may be associated with a cell.
Adding a Caption to a Cell

Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Action Select Edit Cell. Select the Caption Enabled check box. Enter the text you want displayed in the cell in the Caption box (Maximum 20 characters). Click the Foreground button to select the text color. Select the positioning (Top, Middle, or Bottom) of the caption from the Alignment drop-down list box. Press OK to save changes.
186
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Adding a Value to Monitor

Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Action Select Edit Cell. Select the Data Monitor Enabled check box. Enter an address into the Address box. (This address may be the same as or different than the address associated with the picture.) Click the Foreground button to select the text color. Enter numeric values into the Actual Range boxes. (These are the low and high values you expect or know the address will hold.) Enter numeric values into the Scale Range boxes. (You can use the scale range to display a ratio value or an offset value for data analysis purposes. You can also set the Scale range to the same values as the Actual range to display raw data.) Select the positioning (Top, Middle, or Bottom) of the caption from the Alignment drop-down list box. Press OK to save changes.
7 8
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
187
Trend
Trend Overview This view does not allow editing of any on-screen information. It is for viewing data only. When active, this view will display a graphical line chart of data values. The time that the data was taken is displayed on the X axis. The data value is displayed on the Y axis as well as on the right hand legend. This is useful for tracking changes in data over time. There are several Zoom and pan functions available. In the Data Watch Window properties dialog:
Step 1 Action Click the Auto Y Axis Scale check box to have the Y Axis automatically set and adjust to include all data points. - or Enter a numeric value into the Y Axis Min and Y Axis Max boxes to manually set the Y Axis range. Click OK to save the changes and return to the Data Watch Window
Setting the Y-Axis Values
Setting the Alarm Values
The alarm values are a range of safe values. Any value that is outside of this range triggers an alarm state.In the Data Watch Window properties dialog:
Step 1 2 Action Enter a numeric value into the Lo Alarm and/or Hi Alarm boxes. Click OK to save the changes and return to the Data Watch Window.
Setting the Setpoint Value
The setpoint value is a baseline value that can be used as a reference. In the Data Watch Window properties dialog:
Step 1 2 Action Enter a numeric value into the Setpoint box. Click OK to save the changes and return to the Data Watch Window.
Setting the Resolution Value
The resolution value is in Milliseconds and defines the width of the X Axis. This is the time window of the visible data.In the Data Watch Window properties dialog:
Step 1 2 Action Enter a numeric value into the Resolution box. Click OK to save the changes and return to the Data Watch Window.
188
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Using the Graph Functionality
In the trend window:

Step 1 2 3 Action Select the Mode you want to use (Scroll-X, Zoom-X, Scroll-Y, Zoom-Y, ScrollXY, Zoom-XY, Cursor, or Zoom-Box). Left-click the data point you want to work from. Hold-and-drag to manipulate the on-screen view of the data.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
189
Trend - Mode Functionality Table

Data Watch Window - Trend Mode Functionality Table:
Mode Plot Description of Functionality Default view. This is the setting used when viewing a live trend or logged data. If viewing live data, the trend automatically updates and scrolls. Selecting Plot also resets the view to the default by cancelling any scroll or zoom operations. Drag the trend chart left or right to view trend data by time. Not available while viewing live data. Compresses or expands the X (Time) axis. This allows for viewing more detail or more data points. Not available while viewing live data. Drag the trend chart up or down to view trend data that may be beyond the bounds of the current Y axis. Not available while viewing live data. Compresses or expands the Y (Value) axis. This allows for viewing more detail or more data points. Not available while viewing live data. This allows for scrolling of the X and Y axis simultaneously. Not available while viewing live data. This allows for zooming of the X and Y axis simultaneously. Not available while viewing live data. Shows a cursor, the value of the data point and the time it was taken for a given trend line. Specific trend lines may be selected from the legend on the right. The cursor my be moved via the mouse, keys or navigation buttons. Not available while viewing live data. Use a selection box to zoom into a specific part of the trend. Not available while viewing live data. When Checked, the trend only displays the plot of the address selected in the legend on the right. When cleared, all address plots are displayed. Only available in cursor mode with logged data.
Scroll-X Zoom-X Scroll-Y Zoom-Y Scroll-XY Zoom-XY Cursor
Zoom-Box View Selected Only Checkbox
190
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Track Logic Editor

Track Logic Editor When the Track Logic check box is selected, the specified addresses in logic are automatically added to the Data Watch window and their values tracked. When the cursor position in logic is changed, the previously tracked addresses are removed and a new set of addresses are tracked. There are four logic-related options that can be tracked:
l Network - All addresses and their values from the most recently selected network l Instructions - All addresses and their values that are associated with the most l Discrete - All addresses with discrete values associated with the most recently l Address - The most recently selected address and its value is displayed in the
Watch Window. When the Track Logic and Track Traffic Cop check boxes are not selected, addresses must be entered manually into the Watch Window in order to be tracked. Tracking Logic Editor Addresses in the Data Watch Window In the Data Watch Window Properties dialog:
Step 1 2 3 4 Action Select the Track Logic check box. Select the option button (Network, Instruction, Discretes, or Address) that you want to track. Click OK to save the changes and return to the Data Watch Window. Ensure that the Logic Editor and Data Watch Window are open.
in the Logic Editor are displayed in the Watch Window.
recently selected instruction are displayed in the Instruction Window.
selected network in the logic editor are displayed in the Watch Window.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
191
Track Traffic Cop

Track Traffic Cop When the Track Traffic Cop check box is selected, the specified addresses in the Traffic Cop are automatically added to the Data Watch window and their values tracked. As the cursor position is changed in the Traffic Cop, the tracked addresses are also changed. The traffic cop-related option that can be tracked is:
l Slot - The associated addresses of the card in the most recently selected slot are
displayed in the Terminal Block Window. When the Track Logic and Track Traffic Cop check boxes are not selected, addresses must be entered manually into the Watch Window in order to be tracked. Tracking Traffic Cop Addresses in the Data Watch Window In the Data Watch Window Properties dialog:
Step 1 2 3 Action Select the Track Slot check box. Click OK to save the changes and return to the Data Watch Window. Ensure that the Traffic Cop and Data Watch Window are open.
192
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Instruction Editor / Terminal Block Editor

Instruction Editor Overview You can view the addresses and data of specific Logic instructions using the Instruction Editor. Additionally, the DRUM Summary and the PID Summary can activate the Instruction Editor for the DRUM or PID function selected in the summaries. Only the addresses referenced by the current instruction will be included. The display is built using a user-defined VB script. These scripts are editable and may be used to modify the on screen display in any way. Viewing an Instruction in the Instruction Editor Terminal Block Editor Overview The Instruction Window works hand-in-hand with the Logic Editor. To view a certain instruction simply select the desired instruction in the Logic Editor and the instruction will be displayed in the Instruction Window
You can view the addresses and data of specific I/O cards using the Terminal Block editor. Depending on property settings, you can view addresses and edit address values found in the currently selected item (rack or slot) in the Traffic Cop. The display is built using a user-defined VB script. These scripts are editable and may be used to modify the on screen display in any way.
Viewing an I/O Card in the Terminal Block Editor
The Terminal Block Window works hand-in-hand with the Traffic Cop. To view a certain card simply select the desired card in the Traffic Cop and the card will be displayed in the Terminal Block Window.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
193
Instruction / Terminal Block Editor Display Scripts

Display Scripts Overview The Instruction and Terminal Block views may be customized using specialized VB Script files (.ucs). A large variety of .ucs files are provided for common instructions and for some advanced I/O cards. All .ucs files use a standard set of functions that link into the PRWX32 Data editor to provide the on screen elements needed. As well, all regular VB Script functions (such as FOR loops and IF statements) are available. Note: The script must follow standard VBS coding methods and rules.
Creating a Display Script File
From your Windows Start menu:

Step 1 2 Action Open a blank script in a script editor (Notepad or Wordpad). Enter the outline of the new script function as follows: Sub FunctionName(TopAddr, MidAddr, BotAddr, TopLen, MidLen, BotLen, Page, Unused1, Unused2) End Sub Add functions to the script as needed. Note: All functions must be prefixed by Call Editor. E.g., Call Editor.scAddGrid. Save the script in the ProWORX\32\Scripts directory using the naming conventions laid out in Naming a display script file.
3 4
Naming a Display Script File
Rules and guidelines:

Step 1 2 3 Action Script files must be saved with a .ucs extension. E.g., VMER.ucs Instruction scripts must be saved using their machine name. E.g., Correct: MSTR.ucs, Incorrect: Master.ucs Script file names cannot have spaces or punctuation in them. E.g. Correct: DAO84010.ucs, Incorrect: DAO 840 10.ucs, DAO-840_10.ucs
194
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Display Script Variables

Variable Description Table Variables used within the display script:
Variable FunctionName Type NA Description The function name must be the same as the name of the instruction or I/O card it supports. E.g. For the ADD instruction, the function name would be "ADD", and the script file name would be Add.ucs. Instruction Editor: The address in the top node of the instruction. Terminal Block Editor: For cards with input addresses only, the first input address. For cards with output addresses only, the first output address. For cards with both input and output addresses, the first input address. Instruction Editor: The address in the second node of the instruction if second node exists. Terminal Block Editor: First output address for cards containing both input and output addresses. Instruction Editor: The address in the third node of the instruction if third node exists. Terminal Block Editor: Empty. Instruction Editor: The number of implied addresses associated with the address in the top node. Terminal Block Editor: Empty. Instruction Editor: The number of implied addresses associated with the address in the middle node. Terminal Block Editor: Empty. Instruction Editor: The number of implied addresses associated with the address in the bottom node. Terminal Block Editor: Empty. If a page control is specified in this script using scAddPages, this will give the page number to display. Reserved Values.
TopAddr
String
MidAddr
String
BotAddr
String
TopLen
Integer
MidLen
Integer
BotLen
Integer
Page
Integer
Unused1, Unused2 Empty
Note: All of these parameters will pass data into the script
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
195
Display Script Functions

Functions Used Within the Display Script
Note: All functions must be prefixed by Call Editor. E.g., Call Editor.scAddGrid
Note: All strings must be surrounded by quotes. E.g., Call Editor.scSetRowInfo(1, 1, "This is a string description", "Decimal")
scAddGrid (Address, NumRows, VisibleRows)
This is the main function used to display data values. It is responsible for adding a grid of addresses along with their data values and radices. All radices will default to decimal. Grids are numbered starting at 1 in the order that they are added. This number is used as an ID for other functions such as scSetRowInfo.
Variable Address NumRows VisibleRows Type Integer Integer Integer Variable Description The first address in a sequential list of addresses. The number of rows (and addresses) to display in this grid. This will limit the grid to showing only the number of rows specified. Additional rows will be accessible via scrolling.
scSetRowInfo (GridIndex, GridRow, TextString, Radix)
This function modifies the contents of a specific row in a specific grid. The Description and a specific Radix may be added with this function.
Variable GridIndex GridRow Type Integer Integer Variable Description This is the Grids ID Number. See scAddGrid. The row in this grid to modify. Valid rows start at 1 and go to the maximum number of rows this grid contains. The Description text to add. What radix to display the data in. Valid entries are: "Hexadecimal", "Binary", "ASCII", "Float", "Long", "Signed", "BCD", and "Decimal".
TextString Radix
String String
196
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
scGetText (TextIndex)
This retrieves internal PRWX32 text strings. Usually you should use a literal text string ("Hello") instead of this function.
Variable TextIndex Type Integer Variable Description The number of the internal text string you wish to retrieve.
scAddBitDisplay (BitDisplayName , GridNumber, GridRow, LineState, Editable)
This will add an ellipsis button to the specified Grid on the specified Row. This button activates a Bit Display dialog that gives detailed bit-by-bit descriptions and editing capabilities.
Variable BitDisplayName Type String Variable Description This is a name to be used to identify this particular display. A script may create numerous different Bit Displays. This is the Grids ID Number. See scAddGrid. The row in this grid to modify. Valid rows start at 1 and go to the maximum number of rows this grid contains. A string of 16 numeric characters. The first character is the MSB. Each character may be one of: l "0" - No Line l "1" - Horizontal Stub l "2" - Full Line l "3" - End Stub Set to "True" to enable bit editing. Set to "False" to make the display read only.
GridNumber GridRow
Integer Integer
LineState
String
Editable
Boolean
scAddBitInfo (BitDisplayName , BitNumber, BitDescription)
This adds a bit description to the contents of a specified Bit Display created with scAddBitDisplay.
Variable BitDisplayName BitNumber BitDescription Type String Integer String Variable Description This is a name to be used to identify this particular display. See scAddBitDisplay. The number from 1 to 16 of the bit to add the description to. 1 = LSB. The description text to add.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
197
scAddBitEditValue (BitDisplayName , BitNumber, FirstBit, LastBit, Description, Value)
This creates a drop-down list box for a specified bit in the specified Bit Display. This box may be used to set a block of bits to a specific pattern associated with a descriptive state. Only one list entry is added per call. Entries are added in sequential order.
Variable BitDisplayName BitNumber FirstBit LastBit BitDescription Value Type String Integer Integer Integer String String Variable Description This is a name to be used to identify this particular display. See scAddBitDisplay. The number from 1 to 16 of the bit to add the description to. 1 = LSB. The first bit number in a sequence to be modified (MSB). The last bit number in a sequence to be modified (LSB). The description of the list entry. The binary pattern to set the bits to. (E.g.: "110110")
scAddEquation (EquationStr, Var1, Var2, Var3, Var4, Var5)
This will create a functional equation in a box. Up to 5 variables may be included.

Variable EquationStr Type String Variable Description A string containing the equation to display. Use "A", "B" through "E"" to denote a variable. Variables will be mapped to the data in a Grid row. (E.g.: "A + B = C") A string in the format "a,b,r" where a=Grid ID Number, b=Grid Row, r=Radix: "ILDF". The radix value specifies the radix to display the equation data in. Integer, Long, Double, or Float. Double is not a normal radix. It builds a concatenation of 2 16 bit data values. These will be the data values that appear in the equation. Use "" for variables that are not used.
Var1 through Var5
String
198
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
scAddErrorField (GridNumber As Variant, GridRow As Variant)
This will create an error box that displays an error message. This box will only be visible if an error condition is met. Conditions are specified using the scAddErrorFieldText function. Error conditions are a particular value contained in a particular register. A row in a grid defines this. Only one Error Field is allowed.
Variable GridNumber GridRow Type Integer Integer Variable Description This is the Grids ID Number. See scAddGrid. The row in this grid to modify. Valid rows start at 1 and go to the maximum number of rows this grid contains.
scAddErrorFieldText (DataValue As Variant, ErrorText As Variant)
This adds an error condition to an error field. Any number of conditions may be added. A condition is true is a data value equals the specified value.
Variable DataValue ErrorText Type Integer String Variable Description A value that corresponds to an error. The error message to display.
scAddPages (NumPages)
This adds a Page selection control. Only one may be specified at a time. Pages are numbered sequentially starting at one. This is useful if an instruction has a large amount of information to display.
Variable NumPages Type Integer Variable Description The total number of pages to display.
scAddPicklist (ListName, GridNumber, GridRow)
This will add a drop-down list box to a specified Grid at a specified Row. This list will allow the easy selection of specific data values for the associated address. Each pick list must be identified by giving it a name.
Variable ListName Type String Variable Description This is a name to be used to identify this particular pick list. A script may create numerous different pick lists. This is the Grids ID Number. See scAddGrid. The row in this grid to modify. Valid rows start at 1 and go to the maximum number of rows this grid contains.
GridNumber GridRow
Integer Integer
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
199
scAddToList (ListID, ListText, ListValue)
This will add a data value to a pick list created with scAddPickList.
Variable ListID ListText ListValue Type String String Integer Variable Description This is a name to be used to identify this particular pick list. See scAddPickList. Text that will be appear in the List. Usually it describes the purpose of a data value. A data value that will be set if this list entry is selected.
scAddStaticText (TextSting)
This will add a static block of text. This is useful for titles, instructions, or additional information not provided by any other means.
Variable TextString Type TextString Variable Description The text to display.
200
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Register Editor
Register Editor Overview The Register Editor allows you to view and edit data for all available addresses. This includes all discretes as well as all input, holding and extended registers. Note: Addresses cannot be edited since they are specified by a projects configuration. In the Register Editor Window task bar:
Step 1 Action Select an address type (0x, 1x, 3x, 4x, 6x) option button. Note: Extended memory addresses are defined by memory file.
Changing the Displayed Address Type
Displaying Extended Memory Addresses
In the Register Editor Window task bar:

Step 1 2 Action Select the 6x option button from the status bar. Choose an extended memory file from the File drop-down list.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
201
PID Tuner
PID and PID2 Blocks Overview PID and PID2 blocks are software programming blocks that allow a process tobe controlled with no changes or additions to hardware. "PID" stands for "Proportional Integral Derivative". While the PID2 is a more advanced version of the PID, both operate in the same manner. PID/PID2 Process Process Input Set Point (SP) PID Calculation Output Value (OP)
Process Variable (PV) Measurement
Process
Process Output The PID calculation compares a process variable (PV) with a desired control point called the set point (SP). The calculation uses the difference between the set point and the process variable to adjust the PID output value (OV), sometimes called the control variable. This output value is used to manipulate an input to the process so that, eventually, the measured process variable equals the desired set point. PID Tuner Overview The PID summary displays a list of all the PID and PID2 instructions in the logic of the current project. Each row in the grid gives the instruction name, its location in logic, and the addresses of key data values related to that PID block. The currently selected row has an associated PID Faceplate. This faceplate allows simple tuning of the selected PID block. You may invoke manual mode or adjust the setpoint value. Note: There may be a delay while a search is performed for PID instructions in logic.
202
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Adjusting the Setpoint Value
In the PID Summary Window:

Step 1 2 Action Click the Adjust button. Click and drag the slider up to increase the setpoint and down to decrease the setpoint.
Jumping to the Currently Selected PID Block in the Logic Editor

Step 1 2 Action Select the row of the PID or PID2 instruction that you want to jump to. Click the Goto button. (The Logic Editor is activated and the cursor is positioned on the selected PID block.)
Editing PID Data

Step 1 2 Action Select the row of the PID or PID2 you want to edit Click the Tune button. The Instruction Editor is activated containing the selected PID or PID2 instruction. Here you may edit all data values related to the instruction. Click PID Summary tab to exit the Instruction window.
Trending PID Data

Step 1 2 3 Action Select the row of the PID or PID2 you want to trend. Click the Trend button. The Trend Window is activated showing the trend data of the selected PID or PID2. Click PID Summary tab to exit the Instruction window.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
203
Setting the PID Contact

Step 1 Action Click the Force Input Contact check box. Note: This overrides the contact setting by disabling the contact. Ensure that this does not result in any safety issues. The default contact setting is Auto. To toggle the contact click the Auto/Manual button. The label on the button specifies the current state of the contact. Auto = ON, Manual = OFF. Adjusting this disables the contact immediately in front of the top node of this PID instruction and forces it ON or OFF.
204
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
DRUM Summary
DRUM Instruction Overview The DRUM instruction operates on a table of 4x registers containing data representing each step in a sequence. The number of registers associated with this step data table depends on the number of steps required in the sequence. You can pre-allocate registers to store data for each step in the sequence, thereby allowing you to add future sequencer steps without having to modify application logic. DRUM incorporates an output mask that allows you to selectively mask bits in the register data before writing it to coils. This is particularly useful when all physical sequencer outputs are not contiguous on the output module. Masked bits are not altered by the DRUM instruction, and may be used by logic unrelated to the sequencer. Drum Summary Overview The DRUM summary displays a list of all the DRUM, ICMP and SCIF instructions in the logic of the current project. They are sorted by their top address. This address data is known as its Step value. All instructions with the same Step value appear together on the right. All the Step values that are available appear on the list to the left. Each row shows the instruction name, its location in logic, and key data values related to that block. Steps Used, Machine ID. and Profile ID are all editable values. Note: There may be a delay while a search is performed for DRUM instructions in logic.
Selecting a Step
In the DRUM Summary window:

Step 1 Action Select an address from the left panel and all applicable instructions referencing that address will be displayed.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
205
Editing DRUM Summary Data

Step 1 2 3 Action Double-click the Steps Used, Machine ID, or Profile ID cell that you want to edit. Enter a value into the cell. Press ENTER to save the changes, or ESC to cancel the changes.
Editing Instruction Address Data Value

Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Action Select the instruction you want to edit. Click the Sequencer button. In the Instruction Window, double-click the Data cell that you want to edit. Enter a value into the cell. Press ENTER to save the changes, or ESC to cancel the changes. Click the DRUM Summary tab to exit the Instruction Window.
206
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Importing and Exporting Data Watch Window Data

Overview Data watch window data can be imported or exported to or from a text file. This file may be modified with any text editor or spreadsheet program such as Notepad or Microsoft Excel. Importing data watch window data is only available from the data watch window and register editor when in offline mode. Exporting data watch window data is available when in either online or offline mode. Importing Data From the data watch window right-click menu:
Step 1 2 3 4 Action Select Data Utilities Import Data. Select a file (.txt or .csv) to import. Click Open. Data from every address found in the Import file is imported regardless of which addresses are on the screen prior to the import. Any address in the Import file that is in the configured range of the Project being imported to will have its data imported. A progress bars displays the progress of the import.
Exporting Data
From the data watch window right-click menu:

Step 1 2 3 4 Action Select Data Utilities Export Data. Enter a new file name or select an existing file (.txt or .csv). Click Open. The data is exported as follows: Data Watch Window (Offline) - All addresses and data values currently shown in the data watch window are exported. If there are no addresses, nothing is exported. l Data Watch Window (Online) - All addresses and data values currently shown in the data watch window are exported. If there are no addresses, nothing is exported. Note that the exported data is a snapshot of the data values in the PLC. l Register Editor (Offline) - All addresses and data values for the selected address type are exported. For example, if the 4x type is selected, all configured 4x addresses and data will be exported.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
207
Data Formats
Data watch window data import and export file formats:

File .TXT - Tab Separated Variable text file. .CSV - Comma Separated Variable text file. Format Address <tab> Data Address,Data
208
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Working with the ASCII Editor
ASCII Editor
Using the ASCII Editor ASCII messages let your controller report information to you in plain language. Use them, for example, if you want to see a written alert on your screen every time a motor switches on or a printout every hour of how many items have passed by a counter. Use the ASCII Message Editor to enter and edit the messages you want your controller or project to send. Note: Use the ASCII Read Block (READ) and ASCII Write Block (WRIT) in your ladder logic to send a message from a controller to your output device (such as a screen, printer, or disk drive).
Configuring ASCII Messages
Start by configuring your controller or project to use ASCII messages:

Step 1 2 Action Confirm that your controller supports ASCII messages. In the Controller Configuration Window General Tab, configure the controllers ASCII parameters. (Total Messages, Message Words, and ASCII Ports.) For more information see, Controller Configuration - General Tab. Ensure your ASCII ports are configured correctly in the Ports tab of the Controller Configuration Window. For more information, see Controller Configuration Ports Tab.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
209
Message List
The message list panel contains all messages in the current project. Click a message to edit or preview it in the Editor / Preview window. Note: A yellow message denotes a message that has too many words. From the right-click menu:
To... Cut/Copy/Paste messages: Insert a message: Clear a message: Delete a message: Initialize all messages: Function Select cut, copy, or paste Result The message is added to the windows clipboard and can be pasted into any other message. Shuffles the messages up from the selected message. Deletes all words from the selected message. Deletes the selected message and moves messages up. Clears all messages.
Select Insert (INSERT) Select Clear (DELETE) Select Delete (SHIFT+DELETE) Select Initialize
Editor/Preview Window
The editor window is a WYSIWYG message editor. Enter instructions into the editor by using either the toolbox buttons or the keyboard hot keys. The preview window is a view-only preview display of the currently selected ASCII message. To toggle between the editor and preview windows, right-click the desired message and select Preview or Editor. Note: Instructions placed after a carriage return will be ignored.
Note: Do not confuse blank cells with spaces. Blank cells will be removed when the message is saved.
210
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
ASCII Editor Toolbox
To insert an item either click the corresponding button or press the hot-key. Items are inserted at the cursor.
Tool Text Box Description Up to 128 characters of text is displayed. Button Hot-Key T
Binary
A placeholder for a binary field. Defined in ladder logic using a WRIT instruction. A placeholder for an octal field. Defined in ladder logic using a WRIT instruction. A placeholder for an integer field. Defined in ladder logic using a WRIT instruction. A placeholder for a hexadecimal field. Defined in ladder logic using a WRIT instruction. A placeholder for a leading 0 integer field. Defined in ladder logic using a WRIT instruction. A placeholder for an ASCII field. Defined in ladder logic using a WRIT instruction. Consecutive blank spaces are displayed.
Octal
Integer
Hexadecimal
Leading 0 Integer ASCII
Space
SPACE
Carriage Return Repeat
Moves cursor to the next line.
ENTER
A repeat is denoted by a repeat start ({) and a repeat end (}). A repeat must have both a start and an end. A control character is displayed.
{ - Start } - End CTRL
Control
Flush
The message buffer contains a 256 byte data field. These bytes contain data values ranging from 00 to FF. The flush command clears all characters form the message buffer. Removes from 1 through 255 bytes from the beginning of the message buffer.
BACKSPACE
Flush Num Bytes
N/A
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
211
Tool
Description
Button
Hot-Key N/A
Flush Inclusive Clears specific groups of data from 1 to 255 times, or until a match is found. The terminator value determines how many times the buffer is flushed. The controller stops the buffer flushing when it finds a match for the terminating characters. Flush Exclusive Clears the buffer until a match is found for the terminating character pair. It does not flush the match characters. This uses two registers. The first register contains the type identifier and the second contains the hex values of the terminating pair. The hex values range from 0000 to FFFF. The controller searches for this range in the buffer. If the second character of the match pair is not a null (00), then the next character in the buffer must be equal or the search continues. If the last character test is equal or null, the flush is performed up to but not including the matched terminators.
N/A
Tool Properties
Each tool has specific properties that are editable using the properties panel. Changing a tools properties will automatically update the message editor and preview windows.
212
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Working with Macros
At a Glance
Overview When writing logic networks, you may find yourself reusing pieces of code again and again, changing addresses only for a few of the variables. In these cases, subroutines might not be suitable-such as when large numbers of variables are involved or when you want to reuse the same piece of code in different projects. What youre looking for is a macro. This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Macros Using Macros in Logic Page 214 216
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
213
Working with Macros
Macros
Overview Macros are generic pieces of logic networks you create with parameters instead of actual addresses. Macros are programmed offline in the Logic Editor. When you insert a macro in your main project, you map the parameters to real addresses. You can insert the same macro in several places with different sets of mapped addresses each time. The addresses change but the logic stays the same. The main project retains its link to the inserted macros. This means ProWORX 32 notices if you make changes to a macro and informs you when you view it in the Logic Editor. Creating a Macro Project To create a macro project:
Step 1 Action Create a new ProWORX 32 offline project by selecting File New Project from the ProWORX menu. For more information about creating projects, see Creating a New Project, p. 29. Select the Use as a Macro checkbox and complete the remaining new project wizard steps. Once a macro project has been created it is denoted by the macro project icon,
2 3
Editing a Macro
In general, you edit a macro with the same tools as a regular project. However, several ProWORX 32 functions are disabled when editing a macro project. Among them are:
l l l l l l l l
Traffic Cop Config Extensions ASCII Functions Extended Memory PLC Status I/O Drawing Generator Analyze Device Reading and Writing
214
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Working with Macros
Using Macro Parameters
While editing macro projects, you can assign macro parameters in place of register addresses or symbols. These are the addresses that will change for each insertion into the main project. Macro parameters use this format: @txx
l The "t" represents the type of address: 0 for 0xxxx, 1 for 1xxxx, 3 for 3xxxx and 4 l The "xx" represents the parameter number, which can be from 1 to 50.
For example, a macro parameter of @304 would represent the fourth programmable address of the form 3xxxx. Note that @304 and @404 refer to different parameters and are mapped to totally different addresses. You can have a total of 200 parameters in your macro project - 50 for each address type. for 4xxxx.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
215
Working with Macros
Using Macros in Logic

Adding Macro Projects to Logic Insert macros into logic while working offline in the Logic Editor. To insert a macro into a ProWORX 32 project:
Step 1 2 3 4 Action Select Insert Macro from the logic editor right-click menu. The Available Macros list appears. Select a macro from the list and click OK. The Macro Parameters dialog appears. For each parameter, enter a Modicon address in the Address column. When all the parameters have been mapped to Modicon addresses, click Insert. ProWORX 32 checks each address to ensure its valid for the macro parameters address type and range. If invalid addresses are found, you are returned to the Macro Parameters dialog box. Otherwise, the macros logic is inserted into your ProWORX 32 project and you are taken to the Macro Overview screen.
Removing Macro Projects from Logic
Deleting a macro from a project doesnt erase the macro file from your hard drive it just removes an inserted macros logic from your main logic. To remove a macro completely from your hard drive, first remove it from the project as described below, then from the macro project right-click menu in the Navigation panel, select Delete. To remove a macro from a ProWORX 32 project:
Step 1 2 Action Select the macro you want to delete and select Delete Macro from the network navigation panel right-click menu. A confirmation dialog appears. Click Yes and the macro is removed from the project.
216
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Working with Macros
Logic Editor Macro Display Overview
The Macro Overview display appears in the Logic Editor when you move the cursor onto an inserted macro. It also appears just after inserting a macro into a project. This display gives the macros file name, description (the "Detailed Project Name" as entered from the project properties), status, and a list of its parameters and the Modicon addresses or symbols to which they are mapped. The macro status can be one of two things:
l Macro has changed: The macro has been changed since it was inserted into the
main logic network. You may want to update the inserted macro to reflect the changes made to the macro project it is linked to. l Macro not found: The macro project file either no longer exists or has been moved to a different directory. Making Changes in Macros If you make changes to a macro project after it has been inserted into a main logic network, youll have to update each copy of it within that logic network. There may also be times when you want to make changes in logic to a single macro insertion without changing the original macro project. In this case, youll have to unlink that macro insertion. Unlinking a macro removes its connection to the original macro project; the logic in that macro insertion becomes part of the regular main project logic. Once a macro insertion has been unlinked it cannot be re-linked. Changes made to the macro project will no longer be detected by the Logic Editor. Updating a Macro in a Project In the logic editor:
Step 1 Action Move the cursor onto a macro that needs to be updated. The Macro Overview screen appears, with a status that reads "Macro Has Changed." (If the macro status reads "Rec: xxx", where "xxx" is a series of numbers, then you dont need to update it.) From the network navigation panel right-click menu, select Update Macro. The macros logic is reinserted into the logic network.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
217
Working with Macros
Unlinking a Macro from a Project
Note: Once youve unlinked a macro, you cant re-link it.

Step 1 2 3 4 Action While in the Logic Editor, move the cursor onto the macro you want to unlink. The Macro Overview screen appears. From the network navigation panel right-click menu, select Unlink Macro. A confirmation dialog appears. To unlink all macros, select Unlink All Macros from the network navigation rightclick menu. Click Yes to confirm the unlink. The macro is unlinked and the Macro Overview display disappears and you are returned to the Logic Editor.
218
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
ProWORX 32 Utilities
At a Glance
Overview Whats in this Chapter? This chapter gives an in-depth look at the following ProWORX 32 Utilities: This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic BM85 Setup BootP Server Compare Utility I/O Drawing Viewer The Ping Utility MBP Stat Page 220 223 226 228 229 230
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
219
BM85 Setup
Overview A BM85 Bridge Multiplexer allows you to connect up to four Modbus devices or networks of Modbus devices to a Modbus Plus network. The BM85 Setup utility is used to configure a BM85 device. BM85 Setup can be run as either a stand-alone application (BM85_Setup.exe in the ProWORX\32 directory) or as a utility in the utility menu. Working with the BM85 Configuration Dialog In the BM85 Configuration Dialog;
To: Read current settings from the BM85, Write configuration settings to the BM85, Print configuration settings, Save configuration settings to .mux file, Action Click Read from MUX. Click Write to MUX. Click Print. Click Save to File.
Setting up the BM85
In the BM85 Configuration Dialog:

Step 1 2 3 Action Select a Communications Port from the Communications Port drop-down box. Enter a path and file name into the File Name box or click Browse to find a .mux file. To create a new .mux file, click Browse, navigate to the folder you want the file to reside in and Enter a file name (*.mux) into the File Name box. When asked if you want to create this file, click Yes. You can now edit the generic settings. To retrieve and display the current settings of the BM85, click Read from MUX.
220
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Configuring the Modbus Ports of a BM85
Configure each of the BM85s four ports by editing the parameters below:
Parameter Port Type Description Selects the Modbus device that attaches to the port: Master - Select for a master device, such as a PC Slave - Select for a slave device, such as a PLC Network - Select for a network of slave devices connected through a modem l X-Master - Select for a device in Silent Master mode
l l l
Address Baud Rate Stop Bits Parity
Sets the address of a slave device from 1 to 247. Only available when Port Type is Slave. Sets the speed of data transmission in bits per second. The default is 9600. Sets the number of bits at the end of a packet which prepare the receiving device for the next packet. Either 1 or 2. Adds a check bit to a packet to make the number of binary ones always either odd (Odd Parity) or even (Even Parity). If Parity is set to None, the check bit is not added. The PC and controller must use the same parity. Default is None. Selects a communications mode for the port: RTU or ASCII. Default is RTU. Determines the order in which the BM85 checks the ports, with 1 being the highest priority and 4 the lowest. All ports must have different priorities. Sets the maximum time in multiples of 100 milliseconds that the BM85 waits for slave devices to respond to commands before it sends an error message. Determines whether the BM85 maintains a dedicated connection to a slave device until it completes a command or transparently processes other network traffic while it waits. This option is not available unless the port type is set to Network. Note that this option should be set to No for ports attached to 584 controllers operating in SAFE84 Mode.
Data Mode Priority
Link Time-out
Modem Booster
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
221
Working with Routing Paths
In the BM85 Configuration Dialog:

To: Add a routing path Action: Select a table from the Table drop-down box, and an address from the Address drop-down box. Enter a routing path in the Installed Routing Path box. Click Add. Select a routing path from the Address list box and press DELETE or click Remove.
Remove a routing path
Communicating with the BM85
If you are having trouble communicating with the BM85:

Step 1 2 Action Make sure the COM port selected is plugged into the BM85. Make sure the port on the BM85 you are plugged into is in configure mode. Set MODBUS Port Configuration switches on the BM85 to CONFIGURE, PORT 1, 9600 BAUD, NO PARITY, 1 STOP BIT (All off).
222
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
BootP Server
Overview ProWORX 32 supports the configuration of the IP Address of a Quantum NOE Ethernet adapter, an ENT module or a Momentum controller via an Ethernet network. The BootP server lets you record and configure a devices IP Address and, optionally, the Gateway IP Address and Sub network mask. In the navigation panel, utilities tab:
Step 1 2 3 4 Action Select Boot P to open the BootP Server utility. To enable active pinging of devices in the list, select the Enable Active Device Ping check box. To check if there is a device at the specified IP address, click Ping. If successful, the status field displays Device found at specified IP Address. To exit the BootP Server utility, click Close.
Using the BootP Server
BootP Listening
When a BOOTP client such as a PLC requires an IP address, it broadcasts a request for an address across its Ethernet connection and through the TCP/IP network. It continues broadcasting these requests periodically until a reply is received or a set amount of time has passed. In the case where a PLC has a TCP/IP configuration extension active, the information in the extension may be used to configure an IP address if a BootP response is not received. The BOOTP Server listens for these IP address requests and responds accordingly. The response includes an IP address for the client. When the response is received, the client uses this new IP as its own and may then be accessed normally through the TCP/IP network. In the BootP Server utility:
Step 1 Action Click Start Listening to make the BOOTP Server listen for incoming IP requests. The BOOTP Server now responds to any BOOTP IP address requests coming from Modicon devices. Click Stop Listening and the BOOTP server ignores any incoming requests.
Using BootP Listening
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
223
Automatically Checking IP Addresses
In the BootP Server utility:

Step 1 Action Click Enable Active Device Ping. This periodically pings each IP address in the list. The status of the device located at the address is reported back in the Status field. Tip: Use Enable Active Device Ping when performing automatic BootP operations. Once a BootP operation is complete, the success of the operation is updated in the Status column in the list.
Using the Device List
In the BootP Server utility:

Step 1 2 3 Action To add a device to the BootP list, click New Device. To remove a device from the BootP lists, select a device from the list and click Delete Device. To configure a device in the BootP list, select a device from the list and enter the parameters into the available Device Info and Optional Parameters fields. For parameter descriptions, see Device Parameters. To have the ability to write the Gateway address and the Subnet mask to the device, select the Write Optional Parameters check box, otherwise these parameters are unavailable.
224
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Device Parameters
BootP device parameter descriptions:

Parameter Device MAC Address Description Displays the description of the associated row selected in the BootP Parameters table. A 12 digit hexadecimal number uniquely identifying an Ethernet device. A devices MAC address cannot be changed. The MAC Address is on a label (currently marked as the "IEEE GLOBAL ADDRESS") on each Schneider Ethernet device. A logical 32-bit address used to identify a TCP/IP device. Each IP address has two parts: the network ID and the host ID. The network IP identifies all hosts (devices) that are on the same physical network. The host ID identifies a specific host on a network. Each computer that runs TCP/IP requires a unique IP address. The IP Address may be available from or assigned by your network administrator. The existing condition of the ping: l Device Found: ProWORX 32 has found a Schneider device with this MAC address and IP address l Device not found: ProWORX 32 could not find a Schneider device with this MAC address and this IP address. Used to mask a portion of the IP address so that TCP/IP can distinguish the network ID from the host ID. TCP/IP hosts communicate by using the subnet mask to determine whether the destination host is located on a local or remote network. The Subnet Mask may be available from or assigned by your network administrator. For communication with a host on another network, an IP host must be configured with a route to the destination network. If a configured route is not found, the host uses the gateway to transmit the traffic to the destination host. The default gateway is where the IP sends packets that are destined for remote networks. If a default gateway is not specified, communications are limited to the local network. The Gateway may be available from or assigned by your network administrator.
IP Address
Status
Subnet Mask
Gateway
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
225
Compare Utility
Overview ProWORX 32s Compare function finds differences in logic and configuration between a project and a controller or between two projects or between two controllers. This powerful tool lets you be sure that your controllers are using the right logic and are configured properly, and that a local project is the same as your operations master project. The compare function examines any or all of these elements:
Networks Controller configuration DX instructions Traffic cop Segment Scheduler ASCII port parameters ASCII messages Coils used - Up to four ranges, each range 1 - 1600 Coil state - Up to four ranges, each range 1 - 1600 Input state - Up to four ranges, each range 1 - 256 3xxxx registers - Up to four ranges, each range 1 - 99 4xxxx registers - Up to four ranges, each range 1 - 1800 Coil disable - Up to four ranges, each range 1 - 1600 Input disable - Up to four ranges, each range 1 - 256
Using Compare
In the utilities menu, select Compare:

Step 1 2 3 4 Action To view all of the elements, click Advanced. To compare an element, select its checkbox. To compare all elements, click Toggle. To view the master databases existing compare report, select View Report. To compare two projects, click Compare Browse and select a project from the Master Project list. Click To Browse and select a project from the Compare Project list. Deselect both Online checkboxes and click OK. To compare a project and controller, follow step 4 but select the To, Online check box. To compare two controllers, follow step 4 but select the Compare, Online and To, Online check boxes. To run the compare, click OK.
5 6 7
226
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Using the Compare Report
After selecting OK in the compare utility:

Step 1 2 Action After clicking OK to run the compare from the compare setup menu, the compare report is displayed in your default browser. - Elements match. - Element mismatch. - Element compare not applicable. - Element not compared. 3 4 For elements that are mismatched, click the text link to see mismatch element details. To print the compare report select File Print from the compare index page. To include the whole report select the Print all linked documents under the Options tab in the Print dialog. Click Print.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
227
I/O Drawing Viewer

Overview The drawings are in a .DXF format that is supported by most CAD programs. The I/ O Drawing Generator uses the master .DXF drawings to create I/O drawings based on the I/O Configuration and Documentation information. Once the final .DXF drawings are created, they can be imported using your CAD program. This dialog box displays the I/O drawing for the current card. It also allows you to print the displayed portion of the current .DXF drawing using the default Windows printer settings. Several options are available to allow you to view your drawings. Pan allows you to scroll the view of the drawings displayed in much the same way as Autocad. Zoom allows you to zoom in on a selected section of the drawing. Zoom Out takes you back to display the complete .DXF drawing. Using the I/O Drawing Viewer From the Navigation panel, Utilities menu:
Step 1 2 Action Select I/O Drawing Viewer to open the I/O drawing viewer. To pan across the drawing, click Pan. Click the location you want to begin your pan view. Drag the cursor to another location in the drawing and release the mouse button. The view pans from the start location to your end location. To zoom into the display, click Zoom. Click at the start location where you want to begin your zoom. Drag your cursor to mark the area. A rectangle appears to define the section of drawing you want to zoom in on. Release the mouse button. To zoom out of the display, click Zoom Out. To select a different .DXF drawing, from the I/O Drawing Display window, click Open. The File Open dialog box appears. Select the .DXF to display, then click OK. To print a drawing, from the I/O Draw Display window, click Print. The drawing is printed to your default printer. To save the I/O drawing in another format, click Save As.
4 5
6 7
228
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
The Ping Utility

Overview Ping is a TCP/IP utility for testing a given IP address. The address is checked to see if a device exists for it. If the address exists, the Ping is successful and a round trip time (ms) is returned. If the ping fails, an error response will be given. This will help diagnose problems with the TCP/IP communications as well as determining a devices existence. Ping options are saved to the ProWORX .INI file. From the navigation tree utilities tab:
Step 1 2 3 Action Select Ping. Enter the IP address to ping in the IP Address to Ping box. Click Ping to perform a ping. The status of the ping attempt is displayed in the Return Status field and if successful, the ping time is displayed in the Round Trip Time field. Click Close to exit the ping utility.
Using the Ping Utility
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
229
MBP Stat
Overview To access device status and diagnostic tools, select one of the following items from the device right-click menu:
Status and Diagnostic Tools Tool Tabs Description Used to obtain network status of nodes on the network. Active nodes on the network are highlighted. Note: The node that the cursor is on is not highlighted. Nodes on the network that are receiving and passing the token are highlighted. The Token Rotation Time and Token Pass Counter are also displayed. Note: The node that the cursor is on is not highlighted. Nodes that are sending global data to the selected node are flashing if the selected node is configured to receive global data from the nodes. Obtain statistics for the node on which the cursor is located. Node information, such as type, address, version and communication state, is displayed. Communication information and errors for the selected node are displayed.
Bus Status (CTRL+B) Active station table Token station table
Global data station table Network Statistics (CTRL+N) Personality Error counter
Receive buffers When the node selected is receiving specific input from other nodes on the network, the number of receive buffers in use is flashing. Transactions The number of data transactions for the 8 data paths of the selected node: l DM - Data master l DS - Data slave l PM - Programming master l PS - Programming slave The type of programming and/or data activity for the 8 data paths of the selected node is displayed. A flashing square indicates data activity. The global data being transmitted for the selected node is displayed. The data can be viewed in HEX, DEC signed or DEC unsigned format.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Work-to-do
Read Global Data (CTRL+G)
230
Status and Diagnostic Tools
Tool Tabs
Description CPU firmware, hardware revisions, and crash codes are displayed. From here you can access the CPU Status words. CPU firmware, hardware revisions, and crash codes are displayed. From here you can access the CPU Status words.
CPU status (CTRL+U)
Adapter statistics (CTRL+A)
Note: The Refresh slider allows you to set the rate at which the data is updated. To stop communications with the selected device, click Stop. To begin communications with the selected device, click Start.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
231
232
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
ProWORX 32 Reporting
Reporting
Overview The ProWORX 32 reporting feature allows you to print many aspects of your project to a file or printer. Reporting is a very powerful tool, which can be used to extract information from your project into a printed document. From the ProWORX 32 menu:
Step 1 2 3 Action Select File Print to send the currently selected documentation to the printer. Select File Print Preview to view the current report as it will be printed. Select File Print Setup to edit the content and documentation that will make up the report.
Using the Printing Menu
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
233
Quick Picks
Quick picks are pre-defined sets of reporting options. Select an option in the quick pick list box to get a pre-selected list of options for reporting. Choose an option in the list box and the respective report options will be automatically selected. The options are as follows:
Quick Pick Turn off all options Turn on all options All networks Everything but networks All documentation tables All controller tables Description All report options are deselected. All report options are selected. All settings within the Networks report option are selected. All settings within all report options are selected except the Networks report option. All settings within the Descriptor Ranges option and Documentation Tables options are selected. All settings within the Configuration Tables, Traffic Cop, Register Content Ranges, and Used Tables report options are selected. All settings within the Used Tables report option are selected. All settings within the Mismatch Tables report option are selected.
All used tables All mismatch tables
Using the Reporting Setup
After opening the reporting setup dialog (Step 3 in Using the printing menu):
Step 1 Action Select the report options that you want to include in the report, from Networks, Descriptor ranges, Documentation tables, Configuration tables, Traffic cop, Register content ranges, Used tables, and Mismatch tables, by clicking the corresponding check box. Set the parameters within each report option that you have selected. (To see further details pertaining to each report option, see below.) To select all parameters, or deselect all parameters within a report option, click Toggle All. To save the current report options, click Save Settings. To preview the report as it will be printed, click Print Preview. When you are finished setting the report options, click Close.
2 3 4 5 6
234
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Networks
After selecting Networks from the report options list:

Step 1 Action Select which networks that are to be printed by typing the numeric range of networks in the Print Networks box. To select all networks enter "All". To select no networks enter None. Select whether you want One Network per Page or Two Networks per Page. If you select One Network per Page, you can then select Cross References to print all of the cross references that are associated with the particular network, Network Long Comment to print long comments for the particular network.
2 3
Descriptor Ranges
After selecting Descriptor Ranges from the report options list:

Step 1 2 3 4 Action Enter the range of descriptors to be printed for each address type. Valid entries include: "1-100", "None", and "All". Select Items Used in Logic to print addresses used in logic. Select Items with Descriptions to print addresses that have descriptions. Select All Items to print all coils. This includes all items used in logic and items with descriptions.
Documentation Tables
After selecting Documentation Tables from the report options list:

Step 1 Action
l l l l l l
Select any combination of the following documentation check boxes: Log Book / Audit Trail Symbol Table Page Titles Short Comments Long Comments Cross References
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
235
Configuration Tables
After selecting Configuration Tables from the report options list:

Step 1 Action
l l l l
Select any combination of the following configuration tables check boxes: Configuration Segment Scheduler ASCII Messages Config Extensions
Traffic Cop
After selecting Traffic Cop from the report options list:

Step 1 Action
l l l l l l l
Select any combination of the following traffic cop check boxes: Drop Summary Rack Overview Slot Summary Descriptors Symbols Cross References Short Comments
Register Content Ranges
After selecting Register Content Ranges from the report options list:
Step 1 Action Enter a range of register contents to print in the address (3xxxx, 4xxxx, and 6xxxx (file 1 - 10)) boxes. Valid entries include: "1 - 100", "None", and "All".
Address Used Tables
After selecting Used Tables from the report options list:

Step 1 2 3 Action Select whether you want a Brief or Full printout of the addresses used in logic. Select the check boxes of the addresses you want to include in the report from: 0xxxx, 1xxxx, 3xxxx, and 4xxxx. Click the Disable References check box to include the addresses that have been disabled in logic.
236
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Mismatch Tables
After selecting Mismatch Tables from the report options list:

Step 1 Action Select which addresses that have descriptors, but are not used in logic that you want to include in the report by clicking the 0xxxx, 1xxxx, 3xxxx, and 4xxxx check boxes under the Described But Not Used In Logic heading. Select which addresses that are used in logic, but do not have descriptors that you want to include in the report by clicking the 0xxxx, 1xxxx, 3xxxx, and 4xxxx check boxes under the Used In Logic But Not Described heading.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
237
238
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
ProWORX 32 Server
At a Glance
Overview The ProWORX 32 server (see Overview, p. 35) is the repository for projects, the center for security, and a hub for communications. This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Using the ProWORX 32 Server Audit Trail Page 240 243
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
239
ProWORX 32 Server
Using the ProWORX 32 Server

Logging on to the ProWORX 32 Server From the Windows start menu:
Step 1 2 3 4 5 Action Select Programs ProWORX 32 ProWORX Server Enter the user name given to you by the system administrator in the Name field. Enter your password in the Password field. To logout of the ProWORX server, select File Logout. To re-login, select File Login. Click Close to exit ProWORX 32 Server.
Setting the Server Communications
In the ProWORX Server menu:

Step 1 2 3 4 Action Select File Set Server Communications. Select communications type from TCP/IP, MBP Adapter 0, and MBP Adapter 1 that the server uses to communicate with the clients. If you have selected TCP/IP, enter the appropriate TCP/IP port number in the TCP/IP Port Number field. Click OK. To make the communications changes you must restart the ProWORX 32 Server.
Select the Projects tab:

Step 1 Action
l l l l l l l l
Select a project from the project tree. In the Project Info pane you will find: Project Name Project Status - Checked out by username or Not checked out
Click View Project Details to see further project information: Project Name (Long) - A more descriptive project name Project Description - A detailed description of the project Client - The end-user of the project Author - The author of the project Controller Type Controller Address - Communications type and address Click View Audit Trail to view the transaction history of the project.
240
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
ProWORX 32 Server
Creating ProWORX 32 Users
Select the Users tab:

Step 1 2 3 4 5 Action Click Add User. The Add User dialog appears. Enter the new users name in the User Name field. Enter a distinct password in the Password field. Click OK to confirm the new user. To edit a user name or user password, click Edit User. To delete a user, click Remove User.
Creating ProWORX 32 User Groups

Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Action Click Add Group. The Group Rights dialog appears. Enter the name of the new group in the Group Name field. Select Administration Rights for the group. Select Project Rights for the group. Click OK to save the new group. To edit a group name or group rights, click Edit Group Rights. To delete a group, click Remove Group.
Working with ProWORX 32 Users and User Groups

Step 1 2 Action To add a user to a user group, select a user from the Users list, select a group from the User Groups list and click Add User to Group. To remove a user from a user group, select a user from the User Groups list and click Remove User From Group.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
241
ProWORX 32 Server
User Rights
User rights descriptions:

User Rights Controller Configuration Traffic Cop Editor Communications Setup Logic Editor Forcing Insert Delete Sweep Data Editors Extended Memory Configuration Extensions ASCII Messages Documentation Editor Read Write Start/Stop Clear Audit Trails Get Projects Put Projects Descriptions The ability to change the controller configuration, or change controller type. The ability to edit in the traffic cop. The ability to change the communications setup including the controllers address. The ability to edit logic. The ability to force contacts and coils. The ability to insert cells, rows, columns, and networks. The ability to delete cells, rows, columns, and networks. The ability to enter sweep mode. The ability to enter any of the data editors, If deselected, the user is unable to change register data. The ability to edit extended memory registers. The ability to edit the configuration extensions. The ability to edit the ASCII messages. The ability to change any of the documentation. The ability to read from the controller. The ability to write to the controller. The ability to start or stop the controller. The ability to remove all audit trail and logbook entries. The ability to get projects from the server. The ability to put projects to the server.
The Status Tab
The Status tab displays the following project information: l User - The client currently logged in to the ProWORX Server l Transfer Type - The type of transfer being performed (Data or File) l Description: l File - The file name and lock status l Data - The data type l Progress: l File - A progress number or Done l Data - The number of packets transferred
242
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
ProWORX 32 Server
Audit Trail
Overview The audit trail keeps a record of project transactions between the ProWORX 32 client and ProWORX 32 server. Each transaction is stored as an entry in the audit trail. Audit trail comments can be added to each record when putting a project to the server. In the project navigation tree:
Step 1 2 Action From the project right-click menu, select Audit Trail. To view a specific transactions information, select a transaction from the list in the navigation panel. Transactions list: l User - Who made the changes to the current transactions. l Date and Time - When the transaction was completed. l Changes Made - ProWORX 32 areas that were changed from the previous to current transaction. l User Comments - Any notes or comments that the user has entered when putting the project to the server. You can also navigate through the transactions by clicking the standard navigation buttons at the top of the window. To hide or view the navigation panel, click the view tree button 4 5 6 .
Using the Audit Trail
3 To clear all audit trail from transactions from the audit trail, click Clear Audit Trail. To print the current audit trail, click Print. When you are finished, click Close to return to ProWORX 32.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
243
ProWORX 32 Server
244
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Schneider Alliances
At a Glance
Overview Schneider Alliances is a third-party utility used by Schneider Alliances partners to add or modify I/O cards. This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Using the Schneider Alliances Tool Using the Script Editor Using Script Editor Controls Page 246 249 252
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
245
Schneider Alliances
Using the Schneider Alliances Tool

Adding an I/O Card After opening Schneider Alliances:
Step 1 2 3 4 Action Select an I/O system from the I/O System drop-down list box. Click Add. (Certain default values are entered into the parameter list.) Edit the parameters to match the card you are adding. Click Update to save the new data, or click Cancel to remove the new data and start over.
Editing an I/O Card
From the Schneider Alliances default screen:

Step 1 2 3 4 5 Action Select an I/O system from the I/O System drop-down list box. Select an existing card from the Card drop-down list box. (The current card data is entered into the parameters list.) Click Edit. Edit the parameters you wish to update. (See Editing an I/O Card Parameter.) Click Update to save the new data, or Cancel to undo the changes you have made.
Editing an I/O Card Parameter
While adding or editing an I/O card:

Step 1 2 3 Action Press ENTER or click the Value column of the desired parameter. (The selected parameter will now be editable.) Type a valid value or select a value from the drop-down list. (Some parameters require you to click the ellipsis box for further configuration.) Press ENTER to accept the new parameter, or ESC to cancel the change.
246
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Schneider Alliances
Using the MCS Simple 2 Editor
After clicking the ellipsis box in the MCS Simple 2 parameter:

Step 1 2 Action Double-click the 1 or 0 to toggle a bit. Click the Save button to save changes back to the main grid, or click Cancel to return the main grid without updating any changes.
Using the Default Parameter Data Editor
After clicking the ellipsis box in the Default Parameter Data parameter, the Data Values dialog opens, showing the current number of rows in the Number of Parameters Used parameter, and the current value in the Default Parameter Data parameter. To edit the contents of a row, simply double-click the cell you want to edit, and enter a Hex value. Use the following functions to further edit the parameter:
Function 1 2 3 4 Action Click Add. Click Remove. Click Move Up. Click Move Down. Comment A blank cell is added to the end of the grid. The currently selected row is deleted, and the cells below are shuffled up. The contents of the currently selected cell are moved up one cell. The contents of the currently selected cell are moved down one cell.
I/O Card Parameters
Parameters list:
Parameter Card ID INTERBUS ID Drop Allowed Card Description Medium Description Long Description Power Power (+5) Power (+4.3) Power (-5) Description Hex Value. The Unique Modicon ID for each card of an I/O series. Hex Value. The INTERBUS S ID of a card. Momentum Only. Defines whether or not a Momentum CPU supports a non-local, INTERBUS S drop. Description of the currently selected I/O card. This is used throughout ProWORX 32 to pick, edit, and add I/O cards. Maximum ten characters. Text description displayed in the Traffic Cop when editing slot properties of a card. A more detailed description of the card. The amount of power used by the card in the rack. Number of mA used by card at this power rating. Number of mA used by card at this power rating. Number of mA used by card at this power rating.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
247
Schneider Alliances
Parameter Number of Parameters Used
Description The number of Card config parameters that are used by default.
Default Number of The available number of parameter words by default. Parameters In Bytes Out Bytes In Bytes (IBus) Out Bytes (IBus) Module Type Doc Only The number of input bytes used by the card. The number of output bytes used by the card. Momentum Only. Defines the number of input bytes for an INTERBUS card. Momentum Only. Defines the number of output bytes for an INTERBUS card. Defines the type of card. Discrete, Analog, or Analog with no discretes allowed. Certain cards are not programmed into the controller memory, but are still displayed in the traffic cop. These cards are documentation only cards. Type of hardware module. Defines behavior of card. See: Using the MCS Simple 2 editor.
MCS Simple 1 MCS Simple 2
Default Parameter The value of the card config words by default. Data Rack View Bitmap The bitmap displayed in the Traffic Cop rack View. Drop View Bitmap The bitmap displayed in the Traffic Cop in Drop view. Extra Bus Info Script Data Momentum Only. One word that defines extra information for an INTERBUS Drop. The WYSIWYG card config editor.
248
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Schneider Alliances
Using the Script Editor

Overview Schneider Alliances Script Editor is a WYSIWYG property based editor used to create card configuration scripts. The VB Script file used by ProWORX 32 to display card configuration is automatically created by the card configuration editor. These scripts are used by ProWORX 32 to configure optional card parameters in the Traffic Cop. From the script editor dialog:
Step 1 2 Action Click a control in the ToolBox panel to add it to the grid. Set the properties for the control. Tip: To most effectively set your control, select the controls container in the Container property first. This will move the control onto the desired frame. Place the control by clicking the controls center selection handle, and holding and dragging the control to the desired location. Resize the control by clicking and dragging the controls perimeter selection handles to the desired size.
Adding a Control to the Grid
3 4
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
249
Schneider Alliances
Common Properties
Common control properties:

Property Left Top Width Height Caption Container Description The left-most part of the control in twips. Note: For reference, there are 1440 twips per inch. The topmost part of the control in twips. The width of the control in twips. The height of the control in twips. The text display related to the control. The container is the object that the control is anchored to. Note: You can anchor a control to either the form (pbEditor) or to any frame. When a control is anchored to a frame, the controls positional variables (Left and Top) are relative to the anchor, not to the form. The first bit in a range of bits to edit. The last bit in a range of bits to edit. The word number you want to edit. Note: To add a control that whose data value has no consequence to a word, set the Word property to 0. The word list is 1-base. This is a portion of script that will execute when the value of the control is changed.
StartBit EndBit Word
Event
Using the Event Editor Dialog
The event of a control is executed when the data value of the control changes. The event script allows you to enter VB script code to manipulate controls. The event script editor will do minor error checking for syntax mistakes. The gird has a unique Initialize function which is executed when the form is opened. Using events you can hide controls using the .visible property, enable and disable controls using .enabled and many other standard VB functions. After clicking the ellipsis box in the Event property of a control:
Step 1 2 Action Enter VB script code into the event window. When finished, click OK to return to the script editor. Certain errors will be caught by the event script editor and there will be an error message if any errors exist. Certain errors will not be detected by the editor though and the I/O cards script will not be functional in the traffic cop. To cancel your changes and return to the script editor, click Cancel.
250
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Schneider Alliances
Editing Parameter Data Card Config Words Using Controls
In the properties panel:

Step 1 2 Action Comment
Select the control that will be used Valid controls are: Radio Buttons, Check to edit a word. Boxes, Data Edit Boxes, and Combo Boxes. Select a word from the drop-down The word numbers correspond with the list in the Word property. Default Parameter Data words. 1 is the first word, 2 is the second word, and so on. Enter a bit number into the StartBit property. Enter a bit number into the StartBit property. This is the first bit in a range of bits to be edited. Valid bit numbers are 1 through 16. This is the last bit in a range of bits to be edited. Valid bit numbers are 1 through 16.
3 4
Editing Card Config Word Data Example
Word ones current value is 10101010 - 10101010 (43690 decimal). A controls properties are set as follows:
l l l l
Word = 1 StartBit = 9 Word = 16 Data value of the control = 15
When the card config dialog is saved, word ones new value is 10101010 - 00001111 (43535 decimal). Notice, bits 9 through 15 (00001111) are equal to 15 which is what the properties had specified.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
251
Schneider Alliances
Using Script Editor Controls

Frame Frames are used to enclose and group related controls. Scripts allow multiple layers of frames to be added on top of each other. After a frame has been added to a grid or previous frame, any of the available controls can be contained by (anchored to) that frame. Radio buttons are used on the grid or on a frame to display a limited set of options. Only one radio button in a container can be selected at a time. Control-specific properties:
Property Data Description The value that the bits are set to if the radio button is selected.
Radio Button
Check Box
Check boxes are used on the grid or on a frame to display either/or options. Control-specific properties:
Property DataChecked DataUnchecked Description The value that the bits are set to if the check box is checked. The value that the bits are set to if the check box is unchecked.
Label
Most often used as a label for a combo box or a data edit box control, labels can be used for on-screen instructions, as well as further detail or descriptions. The combo-box is used when there are a set number of selections you want the user to be able to choose from. Each item in the list has a corresponding data value. Control-specific properties:
Property List Description The list property provides an ellipsis box which when clicked opens up a Combo Box Configuration dialog. The combo box configuration dialog allows you to enter the contents and related values of the items in the list box.
Combo Box
252
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Schneider Alliances
Creating a List for the Combo Box
In the combo box configuration dialog:

Function 1 2 3 4 5 Action To add an item to the list, Click Add. Edit the Combo List Item and Item Data fields by double-clicking on the cell. To move the item within the list, click Move Up and Move Down. To remove an item, click Remove. To save the items and data and return to the script editor, click OK. To cancel changes and return to the script editor, click Cancel.
Data Edit Box
Data edit boxes are used on the grid or on a frame to allow the user to enter any valid value. Valid values are determined by which radix is set for the data edit box. For example, if Binary is selected in the radix property, only ones and zeros are valid data, and the value can only have a length of 16 characters. Control-specific properties:
Property Radix Description The mode of the edit box. Available options are Decimal, Binary, Hexadecimal, ASCII, and Long. Notes: l All radices are have a 16-bit limit except Long, which has a 32-bit limit. l A Long data type will overwrite the word that is selected in the Word property of the data edit box as well as the next word in the order that they are set in the Default Parameter Data property of the I/O card. l It is not recommended that you put a long data value in the last word. If the last word is selected in the Word property, the Long data value will be truncated and put into the last word. This may alter the results you expected significantly.
Command
The command button is a seldom used control but can be very useful for batch processes. For example, you can have a button that will check or uncheck a group of check boxes, or a button that would clear all fields in a group. The time state property control is different from other controls in that it is a toggle edit combo box. It is used to edit parameters of cards that are actually not passed as data words. Namely, when editing the time-out state of a card, you would use a timestate drop-down to set the parameter to "User Defined" or to "Last Value".
Time State Properties
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
253
Schneider Alliances
254
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Appendices
At a Glance
Overview These appendices provide information on the I/O cards supported by ProWORX 32 and troubleshooting tools and resources. The appendix contains the following chapters:
Chapter A B C Chapter Name I/O Cards Troubleshooting Editing .DIF Files with Microsoft Excel Page 257 271 303
Whats in this Appendix?
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
255
Appendices
256
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
I/O Cards
At a Glance
Overview This appendix lists the I/O cards supported by ProWORX 32 for the following I/O series: This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic 800 A120 Compact TSX Micro Momentum M1 and INTERBUS Quantum Sy/Max Page 258 261 263 265 266 267 270
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
257
I/O Cards
800
800 Series Cards I/O cards supported (in alphabetical order):
Card B802-008 B803-008 B804 B804-016 B804-116 B805-016 B806 B806-032 B806-124 B807 B807-032 B807-132 B808-016 B809-016 B810-008 B814 B814-001 Description 115 VAC 8 Point Output Module Card B872-002 Description 4-20 mA,1-5V 4 Channel Analog Output Selectable 4 Channel Voltage Output 4-20mA 4 Channel Current Output Module Selectable 4 Channel Voltage Output 4-20mA,1-5V 4 Channel Analog Input 4-20mA,1-5V 4 Channel Analog Input -10 V to 10 V 4 Channel Analog Input -10 V to 10 V 4 Channel Analog Input V/A, Thermo, RTD, Strain Gauge Input 4-20mA, 1-5V 8 Channel Analog Input 4-20mA, 1-5V 8 Channel Analog Input -10 V to 10 V 8 Channel Analog Input -10 V to 10 V 8 Channel Analog Input Fast selectable 8 Channel Analog Input Fast selectable 8 Channel Analog Input Select. 8 channel Differential Input V/A, Thermo, RTD, Strain Gauge Input
115 VAC 8 Point Input Module B872-011 16 Point Output Module 115 VAC 16 Point Output Module 115 VAC 16 Point Output Module 115 VAC 16 Point Input Module 32 Point Output Module 115 VAC 32 Point Output Module 24 VAC 32 Point Output Module 32 Point Input Module 115 VAC 32 Point Input Module 115 VAC 32 Point Input Module 230 VAC 16 Point Output Module 230 VAC 16 Point Input Module 115 VAC 8 Isolated Output Module 8 Point Output Module NO Power Relay 8 Point Output Module B872-100 B872-200 B873-001 B873-002 B873-011 B873-012 B873-200 B875-001 B875-002 B875-011 B875-012 B875-101 B875-102 B875-111 B875-200
258
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
I/O Cards
Card B814-002 B814-108 B817 B817-116 B817-216 B818-032 B819-032 B820-008 B821 B821-008 B821-108 B824-016 B825-016 B826-032 B827-032 B828-016 B829-116 B832-016 B833-016
Description NC Power Relay 8 Point Output Module NO/NC Power Relay 8 Point Output Module
Card B877-111 B881
Description Select. 16 channel Single Ended Input Input/Output Module 24 VDC 16 Point Latched Input (TrueHigh) 115 VAC 8 Point Protected Output Module 125 VDC 8 Point True High Output Module 24 VDC Diagnostic Output Module 0-30 kHz 2 High Speed UpCounter Module Input/Output Module 0-50 kHz 2 High Speed UP/ Down Counter 4 kHz CAM ABS Encoder Input,8 Disc Out 1 kHz CAM with Velocity compensation 10 Thermocouple Input Module 8 RTD Input Module 2 Loop, PID Control Module Main Module ASCII/BASIC Module Motion Module Motion Module High Speed Logic Solver
16 Point Isolated Input Module B881-001 115 VAC 16 Point Isolated Input Module 230 VAC 16 Point Isolated Input Module 24 VDC 32 Point Output (True High) 230 VAC 32 Point Input Module 10-60 VDC 8 Point Output (True High) 8 Point Input Module B881-108 B881-508 B882-032 B882-239 B883 B883-001
10-60 VDC 8 Point Input (True B883-101 High) 10-60 VDC 8 Point Input (True B883-111 High) 24 VDC 16 Point Output (True High) 24 VDC 16 Point Input (True High) 24 VDC 32 Point Output (True High) 24 VDC 32 Point Input (True High) 5V TTL 16 Point Output 5V TTL 16 Input (Fast Response) 24 VDC 16 Point Output (True Low) 24 VDC 16 Point Input (True Low) B883-200 B883-201 B884-002 B885 B885-002 B885-100 B885-110 B886-000
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
259
I/O Cards
Card B836-016 B837-016 B838-032 B840-108 B842-008 B846 B846-001 B846-002 B849-016 B853-016 B855-016 B862-001 B863 B863-001 B863-032 B864-001 B865-001 B868-001 B869-001 B872
Description 12-250 VDC 16 Point Output Module 24 VAC/DC 16 Point Input (True High) 24 VDC 32 Point Output (True High) NO/NC Reed Relay 8 Point Output Module NO/NC Reed Relay 8 Point Output Module Analog MUX Module Analog MUX (16 voltage to one output) Analog MUX (16 current to one output) 48 VAC/DC 16 Point Input Module 115 VAC/125 VDC 16 Input (True High) 12 VDC 16 Point Input (Intr. Safe) 4 Channel Register Output (TTL Level) 4 Channel Register Input
Card B887-000 B888-100 D908-110 D908-120 J890-001 J890-002 J892-001 J892-002 P800-003 P802-001 P810-000 P830-000 P840-000
Description 12 Register Bidirectional Datalogic CM1000 AutoID interface Distributed Control Single Distributed Control Dual RIO Single RIO Redundant RIO ASCII Single RIO ASCII Redundant Power Supply Power Supply Power Supply Power Supply Power Supply Power Supply Power Supply Power Supply RIO Processor Single RIO Processor Dual Hot Standby Module
4 Channel Register Input (TTL P884-001 Level) 4 Channel Register Input (TTL P890-000 Level) 8 Channel Register Output (TTL Level) P892-000
8 Channel Register Input (TTL S908-110 Level) 8 Channel Register Output (TTL Level) S908-120
8 Channel Register Input (TTL S911-800 Level) 4 Channel Analog Output
260
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
I/O Cards
A120
A120 Series Cards I/O cards supported (in alphabetical order):
Card ADU 204 ADU 205 ADU 206 ADU 211 ADU 212 ADU 214 ADU 216 CM900 DAO 216 DAP 204 DAP 208 DAP 209 DAP 210 DAP 212 DAP 216 DAP 217 DAP 218 DAP 220 Description 4 Channel Register Input (+/0.5V) 4 Channel Register Input (+/10V) 4 Channel Register Input 8 Channel Analog Input Module 8 Channel Analog Input Module 4 Channel Multi Range A/D Input 8 Channel Thermocouple Auto Interface 24 VDC 16 Point Output Module 24 VDC 4 Point Relay (NO) Module 24 VDC 8 Point Relay (NO) Module 120 VAC 8 Point Output Module 24-230 VAC 8 Point Output Module 24 VDC 8 Point Input/4 Point Output 24 VDC 16 Point Output Module 5-24 VDC 16 Point Output Module 24-240 VAC 16 Point Output Module 24 VDC 8 Point Input/Output Module Card DEP 208 DEP 209 DEP 210 DEP 211 DEP 214 DEP 215 DEP 216 DEP 217 DEP 218 DEP 220 DEP 257 DEP 296 DEP 297 M7251 M7350 MOT 201 MOT 202 P120 000 Description 230 VAC 8 Point Input Module 120 VAC 8 Point Input Module 115 VAC 8 Point Input Module 115 VAC 8 Point Input Module 12-60 VDC 16 Point Input Module 5 VDC TTL 16 Point Input Module 24 VDC 16 Point Input Module 24 VDC 16 Point Input Module 115 VAC 16 Point Input Module Fast 24 VDC 16 Point Input Module 110 VDC 16 Point Input Module 60 VDC 16 Point Isolated Input Module 48 VDC 16 Point Isolated Input Module Programmable Limit Switch Resolver Decoder Function Module 1 Slot 1 Axis Motion Control Module Encoder 2 Slot 1 Axis Motion Control Module Resolver & Encoder Power Supply
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
261
I/O Cards
Card DAP 252 DAP 253 DAP 292 DAU 202 DAU 204 DAU 208 DEO 216
Description LowTemp 24 VDC 8 Point Input/4 Point Output LowTemp 110VDC 8 Point Input/4 Point Output 60 VDC 8 Point Input/4 Point Output
Card P120 125 VIC 200 VIC 205
Description Power Supply 4 High Speed Pulse or 4 VRC Inputs 4 High Speed Pulse or 4 5V TTL Inputs 4 High Speed Pulse or 12 VDC Inputs 4 High Speed Pulse or 24 VDC Inputs High speed Counter/Positioner (2 Relay) 4 Channel High speed Counter/Positioner
2 Channel Register Output (+/ VIC 212 -10V) 4 Channel Analog Output, Opto-Isolation VIC 224
8 Channel Register Output (+/ ZAE 201 -10V) 24 VDC 16 Point Input Module ZAE 204
262
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
I/O Cards
Compact TSX
Compact TSX Series Cards I/O cards supported (in alphabetical order):
Card ADU 204 ADU 205 ADU 206 ADU 210 ADU 211 ADU 212 ADU 214 ADU 216 ADU 257 BKF 202 BKF201-16 BKF201-64 DAO 216 DAP 204 DAP 208 DAP 209 DAP 210 DAP 211 Description 4 Channel Register Input (+/0.5V) 4 Channel Register Input (+/10V) 4 Channel Register Input 4 Channel Analog Input Module 8 Channel Analog Input Module 8 Channel Analog Input Module 4 Channel Multi Range A/D Input 8 Channel Thermocouple 8 Channel Thermocouple Interbus S Slave 16 Word Interbus S Master 64 Word Interbus S Master 24 VDC 16 Point Output Module 24 VDC 4 Point Relay (NO) Module 24 VDC 8 Point Relay (NO) Module 120 VAC 8 Point Output Module 24-230 VAC 8 Point Output Module 120 VAC 4 Point Output Module Card DAP 292 DAU 202 DAU 204 DAU 208 DEO 216 DEP 208 DEP 209 DEP 210 DEP 211 DEP 214 DEP 215 DEP 216 DEP 217 DEP 218 DEP 220 DEP 257 DEP 296 DEP 297 Description 60 VDC 8 Point Input/4 Point Output 2 Channel Register Output (+/10V) 4 Channel Analog Output, Opto-Isolation 8 Channel Register Output (+/10V) 24 VDC 16 Point Input Module 230 VAC 8 Point Input Module 120 VAC 8 Point Input Module 115 VAC 8 Point Input Module 115 VAC 8 Point Input Module 12-60 VDC 16 Point Input Module 5 VDC TTL 16 Point Input Module 24 VDC 16 Point Input Module 24 VDC 16 Point Input Module 115 VAC 16 Point Input Module Fast 24 VDC 16 Point Input Module 110 VDC 16 Point Input Module 60 VDC 16 Point Isolated Input Module 48 VDC 16 Point Isolated Input Module
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
263
I/O Cards
Card DAP 212 DAP 216 DAP 217 DAP 218 DAP 220 DAP 250 DAP 252 DAP 253
Description 24 VDC 8 Point Input/4 Point Output 24 VDC 16 Point Output Module 5-24 VDC 16 Point Output Module 24-240 VAC 16 Point Output Module 24 VDC 8 Point Input/Output Module 24 VDC 8 Point Input/Output Module LowTemp 24 VDC 8 Point Input/4 Point Output LowTemp 110VDC 8 Point Input/4 Point Output
Card FRQ 204 KOS260-24 KOS260-64 MOT 201 MOT 202 P120 000 P120 125 ZAE 201
Description Frequency and Speed Measurement Universal Communications Module Universal Communications Module 1 Slot 1 Axis Motion Control Module Encoder 2 Slot 1 Axis Motion Control Module Resolver & Encoder Power Supply Power Supply High speed Counter/Positioner (2 Relay)
264
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
I/O Cards
Micro
Micro Series Cards I/O cards supported (in alphabetical order):
Card MIC128 MIC129 MIC130 MIC131 MIC132 MIC133 MIC134 MIC135 MIC136 MIC137 MIC138 MIC139 Description 16 IN, 12 Relay OUT 24V DC 16 IN, 8 Relay OUT 24V DC 16 IN, 4 Relay OUT 24V DC 16 IN, 8 Triac 4 Relay OUT 115V 16 IN, 8 Triac OUT 115V 16 IN, 4 Relay OUT 115V 16 IN, 8 Triac 4 Relay OUT 230V 16 IN, 8 Triac OUT 230V 16 IN, 4 Relay OUT 230V 16 IN, 12 FET OUT 24V DC 16 IN, 8 FET OUT 24V DC 16 IN, 4 FET OUT 24V DC Card MIC140 MIC141 MIC142 MIC143 MIC144 MIC145 MIC146 MIC147 MIC148 MIC149 MIC150 MIC151 Description 8 Bit Counter/Interrupt Input 4 IN, 2 OUT 12 Bit 0-10V 4 IN, 2 OUT 12 Bit 1-5V 4 IN, 2 OUT 12 Bit 10V 4 IN, 2 OUT 15 Bit 0-10V 4 IN, 2 OUT 14 Bit 1-5V 4 IN, 2 OUT 10V 16 Bit Timer/Count Value 1 Word IN, 1 Word OUT 2 Words IN, 2 Words OUT 4 Words IN, 4 Words OUT 8 Words IN, 8 Words OUT
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
265
I/O Cards
Momentum M1 and INTERBUS

Momentum Series Cards I/O cards supported (in alphabetical order):
Card AAI030-00 AAI140-00 AAI520-40 AAO120-00 Description 8 Channel Differential Input Card AEC920-00 Description High Speed Counter 50khz
16 Channel single ended Input AMM090-00 24 VDC 4 In / 2 Out Bidirectional 4 Channel RTD/Thermocouple ANM050-10 4 Analog Output 0-20mA ANR120-90 Seriplex Interface Bi-directional Analog (6 in/4 out) with 24 VDC (8 in/8 out) discrete 24 VDC 10 In / 8 Out Relay Single Phase Drive 8 Channel Analog I/P Module 4 I/P / 2 O/P Analog Module 4 Channel Analog O/P Module 24 VDC 16 Point I/P Module 24 VDC 32 Point I/P Module 120 VAC 16 Point I/P Module 230 VAC 16 Point I/P Module 24 VDC 16 In / 16 Out 8 In / 8 Out Relay 24 VDC 16 Point O/P Module 24 VDC 32 Point O/P Module 115 to 230 VAC 16 Point O/P BUS Module Generic INTERBUS S Modules ISP Weighing Module
AAO921-00 ADI340-00 ADI350-00 ADI540-50 ADI740-50
4 Analog Output 4-10mA 24 VDC 16 Point I/P Module 24 VDC 32 Point I/P Module 120 VAC 16 Point I/P Module 230 VAC 16 Point I/P Module
ARM370-30 ATV058-00 BAI036-00 BAM096-00 BAO126-00 BDI346-00 BDI356-00 BDI546-50 BDI746-50 BDM346-00 BDM346-30 BDO346-00 BDO356-00 BDO946-50
ADM350-1X 24 VDC 16 In / 16 Out ADM370-10 ADM390-10 ADM390-30 ADM540-80 ADM690-50 ADO340-00 ADO350-00 ADO530-50 ADO540-50 ADO730-50 ADO740-50 24 VDC 16 In / 8 Out 24 VDC 16 In / 16 Out 24 VDC 10 In / 8 Out Relay 120 VAC 6 In / 3 Out Bi-Dir 115 VAC 10 In / 8 Out 24 VDC 16 Point O/P Module 24 VDC 32 Point O/P Module 115 VAC 8 Point O/P Module
115 VAC 16 Point O/P Module BNO671-00 24 VAC 8 Point O/P Module IBUS-XXXX
230 VAC 16 Point O/P Module ISP001-0X
266
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
I/O Cards
Quantum
Quantum Series Cards I/O cards supported (in alphabetical order):
Card ACI030-00 ACI040-00 ACI050-00 ACI051-00 ACI052-00 ACO020-00 ACO130-00 AII330-00 AII330-10 AIO330-00 Description Analog 8 Channel Unipolar Input 16 Channel Analog Current Module Card DDI841-00 DDI853-00 Description 10-60 VDC 16 Input Module 10-60 VDC 32 Input Module 16/8 Bidirectional 24 VDC 125 VDC 4 Input/4 Output HPO Module 5 VDC 4x8 Output Module 24 VDC 32 Output Module 24 VDC 32 Point Output Module 24 VDC True Low 32 Output Module 24 VDC True High 96 Output Module 10-60 VDC 16 Output 125 VDC 12 Point O/P Module
32 Channel Analog Current In DDM390-00 32 Channel Analog Voltage/ Current 32 Channel Analog Voltage/ Current 4-20 mA Analog Output Module 8 Channel Output Module I. S. 8 Channel Analog Input I. S. 8 Channel Analog Input Current I. S. Analog Output DDM690-00 DDO153-10 DDO353-00 DDO353-01 DDO353-10 DDO364-00 DDO843-00 DDO885-00
AMM090-00 Analog In/Out 4Ch/2Ch ARI030-10 ATI030-00 AUI040-00 AVI030-00 AVI050-00 AVO020-00 CHS110-00 CPS-111 CPS114 8 Channel RTD 8 Channel Thermocouple 16 Channel Universal Input Module 8 Channel Bipolar, Analog Input
DEVNET-08 64 Register Devicenet Scanner DEVNET-32 16 Register Devicenet Scanner DII330-00 DIO330-00 I. S. Digital Input I. S. Digital Output 16 Output Relay 8 Output ISO Relay 24 VDC 32 Point Input Module 10-30 VDC Verified Output Module High Speed Counter 5 Channel
32 Channel Analog Voltage In DRA840-00 Analog Voltage Output Module DRC830-00 Hot Standby 115/230V AC Power Supply 3A 115/230V AC Power Supply 8A DSI353-00 DVO853-00 EHC105-00
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
267
I/O Cards
Card CPS124 CPS-211 CPS-214 CPS-224 CPS-414 CPS-424 CPS-511 CPS-524 CRA211-10 CRA211-20 CRA212-10 CRA212-20 CRA931-00 CRA932-00 CRP811-00 CRP931-00 CRP932-00 DAI340-00 DAI353-00 DAI440-00 DAI453-00 DAI540-00 DAI543-00 DAI553-00 DAI740-00 CPS-424
Description 115/230V AC Power Supply RED 8A 24 V DC Power Supply 3A 24 V DC Power Supply 8A 24 V DC Power Supply RED 8A 48 V DC Power Supply SUM 8A 48 V DC Power Supply RED 8A 125V DC Power Supply 3A 125V DC Power Supply 8A DIO Drop MB+ DIO Drop MB+ DIO Drop MB+ DIO Drop MB+ RIO Drop S908 RIO Drop S908 Profibus DP Interface Module RIO Head S908 RIO Head S908 24 VAC ISO 16 Input Module 24/48 VAC 32 Input Module 48 VAC 2x8 Input Module 48 VAC 32 Input Module 115 VAC 16 Input Module Isolated 2x8 115 VAC Input Module 115 VAC 32 Input Module 230 VAC 16 Input Module 48 V DC Power Supply RED 8A
Card EHC202-00 EHC204-00 EHC208-00 EIA921-00 ERT854-10 ESI062-10 GPS100-00 HLI340-00 HRT100-00 I2T010-00 I2T016-00 MCI186X MCI18X1X2 MCI18X3X4
Description High Speed Counter High Speed Counter 4 Channel High Speed Counter 8 Channel 1 Channel AS-1 Module Interface 32 Point Smart Digital Input 2 Channel ASCII Interface IRIG-B Time Sync Interface Hi-Speed/Latch/Interrupt HART Serial Communications Card I2T 10 Input / 10 Output I2T 16 Input / 16 Output Resolver Interface Module Single Turn Interface MultiTurn Resolver Interface
MMB102-00 Two axis motion with incremental MMB104-00 Four axis motion with incremental MMC120-0X 2-Axis Motion Control MMD102-00 Two axis absolute motion MMD104-00 Four axis absolute motion MSB101-00 MSC101-00 NOA611-00 NOA611-10 NOE211-00 NOE251-00 NOE311-00 Motion Inc Enc Motion Enc/Res Interbus-S Master Module Interbus-S Master with PCP Ethernet TCP/IP Twisted Pair Ethernet TCP/IP Fiber Optic Ethernet SY/MAX Twisted Pair
268
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
I/O Cards
Card DAM390-00 DAM490-00 DAM590-00 DAO840-00 DAO840-10 DAO842-10 DAO842-20 DAO853-00 DCF077-00 DDI153-10 DDI353-00 DDI353-10 DDI364-00 DDI673-00
Description 16/8 Bidirectional 24 VAC 16/8 Bidirectional 48 VAC 16/8 Bidirectional 120 VAC 24-230 VAC 16 Output 24-115 VAC 16 Output
Card NOE351-00 NOE511-00 NOE551-00 NOE771-00 NOE771-10
Description Ethernet SY/MAX Fiber Optic Ethernet MMS Twisted Pair Ethernet MMS Fiber Optic Ethernet TCP/IP 10/100 Megabit Ethernet TCP/IP 10/100 Megabit LonWorks Interface
100-230 AC 16 Output Module NOL911-XX 24-48 VAC 16 Output 24-230 VAC 4x8 Output 24 VDC Input Module 5 VDC 4x8 Input Module 24 VDC 32 Input Module 24 VDC True Low 32 Input Module 24 VDC 6x12 Fast Input Module 125 VDC 24 Point I/P Module
NOM212-10 MB+ Drop Interface Card NOM2XX00 NOP911-00 QSPXM QUCM-SE SERX53-00 XCP900-00 MB+ Drop Interface Card Profibus FMS Interface Module Seriplex Master Programmable communications module Sequence Of Events Recorder Battery Backup
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
269
I/O Cards
Sy/Max
Sy/Max Series Cards I/O cards supported (in alphabetical order):
Card Description Card RIM131 RIM144 RIM301 RIM331 RIM361 RIM731 ROM121 ROM122 ROM131 ROM141 ROM221 ROM271 ROM421 Description High Speed Counter Module Multiplexed BCD Input Module 85-140 VAC 16 Input Module 32-Function 24V DC Input 16-Function 240V AC/DC Input 64-Function 24V AC/DC Input 4-Function Analog Output 4-Function Isolated Output Stepper Motor Controller Module Multiplexed BCD Output Module 16-Function 120V AC Output 16-Function 120V AC RelayOutput 35-140 VAC 16 Output Module 16-Function 240V AC Output 32-Function 24V DC Output 64-Function Relay Output 16 In Simulator
CRM931-D1 Digital 2 Slot RIO Adapter CRM931-D2 Digital 4 Slot RIO Adapter CRM931-D4 Digital 8 Slot RIO Adapter DRM931-D8 Digital 16 Slot RIO Adapter CRM931RG RDI116 RDI132 RDI1XX RDO616 RDO732 RDOXXX RIM101 RIM121 RIM123 RIM125 RIM126 RIM127 Register RIO Adapter Module 16 Channel Input 32 Channel Input Input Module 16 Channel Relay Output 32 Channel Relay Output Relay Output 16-Function 120V AC/DC Input 4-Function Analog Input
8 Channel High Speed Analog ROM431 Input 16-Function Analog Input 8 Channel Analog/Thermo Input ROM441 ROM871
12 Channel RTD Input Module SIM116
270
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Overview This chapter includes various tools and resources for troubleshooting networks, ladder logic, I/O cards, etc. Contact support (see Contacting Schneider Electric, p. 26) if you require further information about I/O cards. This chapter contains the following sections:
Section B.1 B.2 Topic General Troubleshooting Status Words for S901 and S908 Page 272 280
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
271
Troubleshooting
B.1
General Troubleshooting
Section Overview
Overview The Troubleshooting tools help to reduce down time and improve your maintenance personnels understanding of the controller installation. This section contains the following topics:
Topic Isolating Faults Manual Procedure List Modbus Plus Stopcode Error Analysis Page 273 274 276 277
Whats in this Section?
272
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Troubleshooting
Isolating Faults
Isolating Faults Faults can fit into one of four categories:
Fault Input/Output Faults Possible Causes/Fixes This is the most common type of fault. It occurs when an open, short, or an electrical or mechanical malfunction happens. Common locations for these faults are in the field devices and the wiring between the I/O module that interfaces to the field device. These faults include a faulty controller or improper ladder logic. The Controller Manual Check helps isolate a faulty Controller. Communication Faults: Modicon controllers communicate with the I/O sub system through remote I/O processor communication networks or within local drops on the Modbus subsystem. Faults occur when two pieces of hardware unexpectedly stop communicating or communications becomes unintelligible. When the warning Command Not Valid Unless Logged In appears, check the following: l Ensure the cable is properly attached to the controller. l Ensure that the controller youre connected to isnt logged onto by another user. l Ensure youre using the correct cable. l Ensure the cable is connected to the correct controller port. If the problem persists, contact Schneider Electrics Customer Support.
Controller Faults Communication Faults
Invalid Command
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
273
Troubleshooting
Manual Procedure List

Procedure One Controller failed to power up with good AC supply and fuse OK:
Step 1 2 3 4 Action Ensure that the power supply jumper is correct on the slot mount controllers. Check the input power select switch position is correct for supply voltage. Check for loose crimps or screws at the power supply terminal strip. Check fuses where relevant.
Procedure Two
To replace a 38x/48x fuse:

Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Action Remove memory and executing cartridges. Remove 9 screws that hold the side (1/4 inch nut driver). Remove line cord cover screws and the plastic line cord cover. Remove 2 line cord standoffs (3/16 inch nut driver). Remove screws near battery compartment. The front part of the controller can now separate from the circuit board. The fuse is located near the AC power connector. Replace fuse with the same size and type.
Procedure Two
To replace a 68x/78x fuse:

Step 1 2 3 4 5 Action Remove 2 thumbscrews and 2 machine screws with start washers as shown on front view. Remove small cover. Remove 4 machine screws from rear cover and slide rear cover back 3 inches. (Exec pack cover may have to be removed from the right side). Carefully slide the left side section toward the back expose the two fuses. Replace blown fuses with the same type and size.
274
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Troubleshooting
Procedure Two
To replace a P930/P933 fuse:

Step 1 2 3 4 5 Action Turn off the P930/P933 power supply. Turn off the supply power to the power supply. Remove the supply power line from the P930/P933 power terminal. Loosen mounting screws on top and bottom of the front face of the P930/P933 and slide the P930/P933 out of the chassis. Replace fuse with on of the same type and size.
Procedure Three
Failure to attach to a running controller:

Step 1 2 3 4 Action Ensure that the proper cables and software are being used. Are the communication parameters on the computer the same as those on the controller? Check the cable attachment and pinout. If Modbus Plus is being used then ensure the Modbus Plus driver is installed and the Modbus Plus active LED on the SA85 or PC85 card and the controller are flashing at six times a second. (The Modbus Plus Indicator normal operating state.) If this is the first time this cable has been used then test the cable.
Procedure Four
If Modbus Plus is the chosen mode of communication, please ensure that the Modbus Plus driver software is installed. You may use the Modbus Plus diagnostic tools included with the driver suite. Check if the Modbus Plus active LED is flashing both at the interface card (PCI85 or SA85) and at the PLC. Normal indication is six times per second.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
275
Troubleshooting
Modbus Plus
Modbus Plus Communications for Concept Exec Loader Modbus Plus Indicator When using Modbus Plus communications and the interrupt is NOT "5C", you must add the following line to the "modicon.ini" file located in the Windows folder: Under the heading: [Ports] MBP0 (or MBP1) = interrupt 5D On most Modbus Plus devices, a green LED flashes a repetitive pattern indicating the communication status of the node. The patterns are: l Six flashes per second: Normal operating state. The node is successfully receiving and passing the token. All nodes in operation on the network should be flashing this pattern. l One flash per second: Node is offline after just being powered up or there is another node on the network with the same address (duplicate addresses are not allowed). The node remains in this state for five seconds, then attempts to go to its normal operating state. l Two flashes, then OFF for two seconds: Node is hearing the token being passed among other nodes, but is never receiving the token. Check the network link for an open or short circuit, or defective termination. l Three flashes, then OFF for 1.7 seconds: Node is not hearing any other node. It is periodically claiming the token, but finding no other node to which to pass it to. Check the network link for an open or short circuit, or defective termination. l Four flashes, then OFF for 1.4 seconds: Node has heard a valid message from another node that is using the same address as this node. The node remains offline in this state as long as it continues to hear the duplicate address. If the duplicate address is not heard for five seconds, the node then changes to the pattern of one flash every second.
276
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Troubleshooting
Stopcode Error Analysis

Stopcode Error Analysis Bit/Error reference:
Bit 0 (0001 Hex) Error Description
Illegal Configuration Someone or something has probably been modifying controller memory and the configuration is not valid for this controller. The error may also be caused by a bad memory board or Executive pack or by inserting the wrong memory or executive into a controller. 984 A/B/X and 584 - Information saved in a coil and register has been Backup Checksum corrupted. In order to recover the corrupted information, the program must be reloaded. A bad Error memory board may also cause this error. 984 -80 Series (984 A/B/X - some PROMS) Discrete Disabled Error Logic Checksum Error Usually caused by trying to start the controller in the optimized mode with discrete points that are disabled. The calculated user logic checksum does not agree with the stored checksum. It can be caused by an illegal change of memory or by a bad memory board. Try reloading the program. This error also occurs if the ASCII area has been loaded incorrectly. If reloading fails then try initializing the ASCII area. As a last resort try replacing the memory board. This error usually occurs when loading the controller. It may be caused by loading or relocating a program from a machine supporting a DX instruction not supported or configured for in the target machine, i.e. relocating a program with an HSBY function block to a 984 not configured for an HSBY. It may also be caused by loading a program made on a 24 bit machine to a 16 bit machine i.e., specifying a constant greater than 999.
1 (0002 Hex)
1 (0002 Hex)
2 (0004 Hex)
3 (0008 Hex)
Invalid Node Type
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
277
Troubleshooting
Bit 4 (0010 Hex)
Error
Description
Causes: S908 RIO Head Failure or Remote I/ l A failed S908 RIO board (replace the board) O option failed l Illegal board configuration in the 984 (e.g., the wrong PROM pack) l Configuring for more than one drop and not attaching anything to the S908 l Cards contained in the Traffic Cop that are not present in the field or cards in the field that mismatch with the Traffic Cop. l Powering up an intelligent I/O card (B984) at the same time as the 984 l Attempting to start an HSBY system without the S908 cards interconnected. l Cycling power on the controller may be necessary to clear this error. 984 A/B/X and 584 CPU Diagnostic Failure 984 -80 Series Bad Coil Used Table Real Time Clock Failure Watchdog Time Expired Real I/O Option Failed The CPU board is bad and should be replaced.
5 (0020 Hex)
5 (0020 Hex) 6 (0040 Hex) 7 (0080 Hex)
The coils existing in the logic do not match those found in the used table. The CPU board is bad and should be replaced. This bit is usually set in conjunction with another. It often signals a Data transfer program that is too large. The logic is not being solved fast enough. Check that the S908 card is properly installed and that its ready light is on steady.
(0090 Hex) 8 (0100 Hex)
No EOL Detected or This error usually occurs when a startup is attempted after the incomplete loading of a program. Bad Number of Reload or try another program. Segments Note: You may receive this system error when you first configure the system, before you have programmed any logic. This is not a fatal error. The system cannot find the end of logic because there is no logic programmed from the primary to the standby state. 984 A/B/X and 584 State RAM Test Failure The continuously running diagnostics have failed. Replace the RIO processor.
9 (0200 Hex)
278
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Troubleshooting
Bit 9 (0200 Hex)
Error 984 -80 Series Bad Power Down Checksum SON Did Not Start Segment Bad Segment Scheduler Table Illegal Peripheral Intervention Dim Awareness 984B and 584 Extended Memory Parity Error 984 -80 Series Traffic Cop Failure
Description Cycle the power on the controller to clear the error or Start Controller. Improper programming from a programming device or software package is usually the cause of start-ofnode failure. The Segment Scheduler has been programmed improperly. This error is caused by an attempt to clear the System Stop State word. A programming device has altered memory in a non-authorized manner. The 984 has not been configured successfully. This bit can be set in conjunction with other flags. This error indication pertains to the 984B or extended memory 584 only. Try reloading memory. If that fails to solve the problem, replace the memory board. Usually caused by configuring for more than one drop and not having an S908 remote I/O processor in the controller rack. This error can also be caused by too many points contained in the Traffic Cop (512 inputs and 512 outputs allowed per drop), or by more cards in Traffic Cop than physically present (Micro 984). This simply indicates the PLC has stopped.
10 (0400 Hex)
11 (0800 Hex) 12 (1000 Hex)
13 (2000 Hex) 14 (4000 Hex)
14 (4000 Hex)
15 (8000 Hex)
Peripheral Port STOP
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
279
Troubleshooting
B.2
At a Glance
Overview
Status Words for S901 and S908
With both the S901 and S908 controllers, the first 11 Status Words are always found at absolute memory address 65-6F hex. Pointers determine the absolute memory locations of the remaining words. A pointer for the start of the status information is always located at address 6F hex. This section contains the following topics:
Topic ASCII Message Status Cable A Errors Cable B Errors Communication Status Controller State Controller Status EOL (End of Logic) Pointer Global Errors S911 Hot Standby Status (S908) Local Drop Communications Errors (S908) Machine Configuration Module Health Number of Segments Status Word Pointer Table RIO Time-out Run/Load/Debug Status S901/J200 Status S908 Errors Stopcode Page 281 282 283 284 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 295 296 297 298 299 300 301
Whats in this Section?
280
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Troubleshooting
ASCII Message Status

Word 6D Hex (109 Decimal) This word reflects the status of the ASCII message database. Bits set in this word indicate that errors occurred while creating or editing ASCII messages.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Number of ASCII messages and number of messages pointers do not match Invalid message pointer Invalid message Message checksum error
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
281
Troubleshooting
Cable A Errors
Cable A Errors Cable A is the main cable connecting the remote I/O Processor to the Remote I/O Interface.
Status Word 173 Description The count of frame size errors and DMA overrun errors. The high order byte represents a count of Cable A frame size errors. This indicates that the length of the data message was incorrect. The low order byte represents a count of DMA receiver overrun counts. This indicates that the hardware had more data to send than was required. The Cable A LAN receiver error counter and the Bad Drop reception on cable A counter. This indicates a cable or noise problem to a drop. The "Drop Communication Errors (173)" should be examined to determine which drop is having problems. The last received LAN error code for cable A. The LAN hardware detected an error in receiving a message.
174
175
1 = Overrun error 1 = Alignment error 1 = CRC error 1 = Received message OK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 = No end frame 1 = Short frame
282
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Troubleshooting
Cable B Errors
Cable B Errors Cable B is the secondary or redundant cable connecting the Remote I/O Processor to the Remote I/O Interface (optional redundant cables).
Status Word 176 Description The count of frame size errors and DMA overrun errors. The high order byte represents a count of Cable B frame size errors. This indicates that the length of the data message was incorrect. The low order byte represents a count of DMA receiver overrun counts. This indicates that the hardware had more data to send than was required. The Cable B LAN receiver error counter and the Bad Drop reception on cable B counter. This indicates a cable or noise problem to a drop. The "Drop Communication Errors (173)" should be examined to determine which drop is having problems. The last received LAN error code for cable B. The LAN hardware detected an error in receiving a message.
177
178
1 = Overrun error 1 = Alignment error 1 = CRC error 1 = Received message OK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 = No end frame 1 = Short frame
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
283
Troubleshooting
Communication Status
Communication Status 1/2 (S901) The Remote I/O communication Status Word 1 shows errors and normal operating indication of the indicated channel pair. Under normal operating conditions the lower byte should be counting and the upper portion of the byte should match the lower portion of the byte. Any bits set in the upper byte indicates an error condition for the channel pair. Note that a disconnected channel pair or a channel pair that does not exist will set the function scheduled to 001 (Restart - communication reset). 1 = Message from controller is queued Current message frame # to drop Cable ID: 0 = Cable 0, 1 = Cable 1 # of next expected frame from drop 1 = Current message not accepted at drop
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 = Current message not supported 1 = Response message count > transmitted byte count 1 = Response from remote interface not what expected Function schedule Function Schedule:
Binary Number Description 000 001 010 100 Normal I/O Restart (comm reset) Restart (application reset) Inhibit
284
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Troubleshooting
Communication Status 2/2 (S901)
The Remote I/O communication Status Word 2 shows errors and the retry count on lost communications. If communications is lost with the channel pair then the corresponding error bit will be set and the retry counter will increment. If the retry counter counts to maximum then other indicators will be affected. Module health will show as 0. If communication is re-established, this error count and error word is not cleared. The only way to clear this word is to cycle power on the controller or issue a start and stop command.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Retry counter 1 = Command not supported by drop 1 = Invalid frame number 1 = Drop just powered up 1 = Address did not respond 1 = CRC error from address drop 1 = Character overrun error from addressed drop
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
285
Troubleshooting
Controller State
S908 Controller Word 65 Hex (101 Decimal) The Controller state word shows information pertaining to the state and size of the controller. A state is any condition, which is either set for the life of the controller (16bit vs. 24-bit) or set by external events (memory protect). The upper bits have no meaning for an 984/S908 or 80 -85 controllers. The AC power bit will always be on or monitoring would not be possible. The down size flag indicates controllers with < 4K logic memory. Some Micro 984 controllers show a 0 for battery failed. The 16 bit user logic bit indicates controllers that support 2048 references. (The 984B and the 780/785 are 24-bit controllers.)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 = Battery failed 1 = Memory protect OFF 1 = Run light OFF 1 = AC power ON 1 = 16-bit user logic (Max 2048 reference system 1 = Single sweep invoked 1 = Constant sweep invoked S901 Controller Word 65 Hex (101 Decimal) The Controller state word shows information pertaining to the state and size of the controller. A state is any condition that is either set for the life of the controller (16bit vs. 24-bit) or set by external events (memory protect). The AC power bit will always be on or monitoring would not be possible. The down size flag indicates controllers with < 4K logic memory. The 16-bit user logic bit indicates controllers that support 2048 references. (The 984B and 584 Level 4 are 24-bit controllers.)
D0 D1 D2 D3 Reserved Set offline mode Set data exchange active Operating mode
286
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Troubleshooting
Controller Status
S908 and S901 Controllers Word 67 (103 Decimal) The controller status words indicate certain statuses of the machine. A status is any condition which changes during the running of the controller, usually from an internal event. Word 3 (4xxxx + 2) - General controller status:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 = Existing DIM AWARENESS Single sweeps (00) 1 = Constant sweep time exceeded 1 = Start command pending 1 = First scan
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
287
Troubleshooting
EOL (End of Logic) Pointer

Word 6B Hex (107 Decimal) This location contains the end of logic pointer. The EOL pointer provides the hexadecimal address of the end of user logic.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
EOL pointer address
288
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Troubleshooting
Global Errors
Global Errors
Status Word 179 Description The Global Communication Status. This word stores communications status for both cable A and cable B. Cable A is the main cable connecting the remote I/O Processor to the Remote I/O Interface. Cable B is the optional secondary or redundant cable. The specific information stored is shown in the figure below. Global Cumulative error counter for cable A. High byte - Framing error count / Low byte - No response count. Errors counted here cause the error counters in Cable A Errors, p. 282 to increment. Global Cumulative error counter for cable B. High byte - Framing error count / Low byte - No response count. Errors counted here cause the error counters in Cable B Errors (169) to increment.
180
181
Figure 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Dropout counter 0 = Cable B status error 0 = Cable A status error 0 = Communication health error Retry counter
Note: It is possible for bits 2 and 3 to be 1 and bit 1 to be 0 "Cables (171)"
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
289
Troubleshooting
S911 Hot Standby Status (S908)

Word 66 Hex (102 Decimal) The hot standby status is valid if a redundancy system is present. It shows if the unit is reporting present and healthy and the word also indicates if the unit is the primary or secondary controller. Word 4 (4xxxx + 3) - S911/R911 Hot Standby Status
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
S911/R911 present and healthy 0 = Controller set to A 1 = Controller set to B 0 = Controllers logic matches 1 = Controllers logic mismatches Remote system state Local system state System State:
Binary Number 01 10 11 Description Offline Primary Secondary
290
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Troubleshooting
Local Drop Communications Errors (S908)

Status Words 182-184 Status Words 182 to 184 show the status of the local drop communication errors (when a local drop is present). The first drop may or may not be a local drop depending upon the controller type being used.
Status Word 182 183 Description The overall health and retry counter for the local drop. If the MSB is not 1 then there are Module Health (166) errors on the local drop. The ourbus error count for the local drop. If the count is incrementing then there are errors on the local drop. This may be caused by invalid information in the traffic cop, an unhealthy module in the local drop, or a mismatch between the traffic cop and the module that exists in a slot located in the local drop. The ourbus retry count for the local drop. Under normal operating conditions, only the all modules healthy bit should be set.
184
Figure 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 = All modules healthy Retry counter
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
291
Troubleshooting
Machine Configuration
Word 61 Hex (97Decimal) This screen shows the options that are present for the attached controller. These options include remote I/O (S908 processor), Modbus II, Hot Standby, Distributed Control Processor (D908) and Coprocessors. It also indicates whether or not the time of day option is available for this controller and the remote I/O adapter size. Note: Some versions of the S908 remote I/O processor only support 6 remote drops. A 1 indicates that an option is present. Figure 1 0 = Small RIO (7 drops including 1 local) 1 = Large RIO (32 drops including 1 local) 0 = TOD present
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 = Copro 4 present 1 = Copro 3 present 1 = Copro 2 present 1 = Copro 1 present 1 = DCP present (-80), SA85 present (984 A/B) 1 = HSBY present 1 = Modbus II present 1 = Remote I/O present (RIO)
292
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Troubleshooting
Module Health
S908 Controller Module Health Status information consists of up to 160 words. A single bit is used to represent the Health Status of a single module. A binary 1 means that the module is healthy. Each drop in the I/O sub system has five words allocated to contain I/O module status. Each of these five words contains the I/O module status of a single rack within the drop. The most significant bit (MSB) represents the status of the module in slot 1. Slot 2 module status is represented by the bit to the immediate right of the MSB. A healthy I/O module must meet the following conditions: l The specified slot must be configured in the Traffic Cop. l The slot must contain the module specified in the Traffic Cop. l Valid communication must exist between the module and the interface. l Valid communication must exist between the interface module and the controller.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Odd channel bits 1 through 8 Even channel bits 9 trough 16
Note: If a module is configured in the Traffic Cop and active, then the bit will be 1.
WARNING Upgrade Recommended On systems using J890/J892s with PROM rev 1000, slot 1 will be the LSB. J890/J892s with PROM revs greater than 1000 will appear as previously described. The earlier J890/J892s should be upgraded as they will be incompatible with any user programming that assumes slot 1 status to be the MSB. Failure to follow this precaution can result in severe injury or equipment damage.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
293
Troubleshooting
S901 Controller
The I/O Module Health Status information consists of words that represent the module health for channel pairs. Each word represents 2 channels. The words are also divided into input modules and output modules. A single bit is used to represent the Health Status of a single module. If the slot is inhibited in the Traffic Cop then the bit will be a 0. If the slot contains an input module then the bit will be a 1. This will not be the case if the Communication Status Word 2/2 (183) indicates an error. If the slot contains an output module and if the active light is on then this bit will be a 1. If the active light is off then this bit will be a 0. It is common to set the status indicator for an output slot to toggle between 0 and 1 when active and healthy. The Upper byte contains the status of the lower channel number of the channel pair (for example, channel 1 for channel pair 1/2). The lower byte contains the status of the higher channel number of the channel pair. Each byte represents the status of slots 1 to 8 of the channel. The Most Significant Bit of the channel represents slot 1 and the Least Significant Bit shows the status of slot 8. Status Word #012: Drop # 01/01 Rack # 1/5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Slot #1 through Slot #11 E-Series Plus these five w/Quantum
294
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Troubleshooting
Number of Segments
Word 6A Hex (106 Decimal) This word is confirmed during power up to be the number of I/O exchange nodes plus 1 (for end of logic). If this is not true then a stop code of 0100 would result.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Number of segments
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
295
Troubleshooting
Status Word Pointer Table

Description The address in 6F points to a table of pointers 76 words long. It is important to remember that this 76 word long table is a table of address pointers for the 75 word long system status area.
296
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Troubleshooting
RIO Time-out
Word 6C Hex (108 Decimal) This word contains the Remote I/O time-out constant and a bit that indicates if redundant cables are present. Note: Cable A and Cable B are used for remote I/O communications.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Redundant remote I/O cables Remote I/O timeout constant
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
297
Troubleshooting
Run/Load/Debug Status
Word 6E Hex (110 Decimal) This word is a mode indicator for 984 controllers. The load mode is used for loading a program to the controller. The run mode indicates that the controller was started in the optimized mode (no editing allowed while running). The debug mode is the normal mode of operation for a controller. In this mode network editing is allowed while the controller is running.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
0 0 1 0 = Debug 1 = Run 0 = Load
298
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Troubleshooting
S901/J200 Status
Word 68 Hex (104 Decimal) This word shows the status of the remote I/O processor. The upper 4 bits should be zero under normal operating conditions. An error indicates a failure in the remote I/ O processor.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 = S901 (J200) memory failure RIO error status 1 = S901 (J200) loopback failure 1 = S901 (J200) timeout 1 = S901 (J200) bad RIO error status:
Binary Number Description 000 001 010 011 100 RIO did not respond No response on loopback Failed loopback data check Timeout while awaiting response RIO did not accept all of message
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
299
Troubleshooting
S908 Errors
S908 Errors This word is the S908 start error code. This word will always be 0000 in a running system. If an error does occur, the controller will not start and will generate a Stopcode system error of 4000.
Number 1 2 3 4 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 21 22 Description Bad Traffic Cop Length Bad Remote I/O Link Number Bad Number of Drops Bad Traffic Cop Checksum Bad Drop Descriptor Length Bad I/O Drop Number Bad Drop Holdup Time Bad ASCII Port Number Bad Number of Modules in Drop Drop Already Configured Port Already Configured More than 1024 Outputs More than 1024 Inputs Bad Module Slot Address Bad Module Rack Address Bad Number of Output Bytes Number 23 25 26 27 28 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 40 41 42 43 Description Bad Number of Input Bytes Bad First Reference Number Bad Second Reference Number No Input or Output Bytes Discrete Not on 16 Bit Boundary Unpaired Odd Output Module Unpaired Odd Input Module Unmatched Odd Module Reference 1xxxx Reference After 3xxxx Register Dummy Module Reference Already Used 3xxxx Module Not a Dummy 4xxxx Module Not a Dummy Dummy Then Real 1xxxx Module Real Then Dummy 1xxxx Module Dummy Then Real 3xxxx Module Real Then Dummy 3xxxx Module
300
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Troubleshooting
Stopcode
S908 Controller Word 69 Hex (105 Decimal) This word contains a Stopcode that describes what kind of stop state (if any) that the machine has. A 1 in the most significant bit indicates that the controller is not running. Any other 1 bit indicates an error. It is possible to have multiple errors. For a detailed explanation of Stopcodes, see Stopcode Error Analysis, p. 277. Illegal configuration State RAM checksum error User logic checksum error Invalid node Invalid traffic cop CPU logic solver failed or coil use table (for other controllers) Real time clock error Watchdog timer expired
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
No EOL / Bad # segments State RAM test failed Start of node did not start segment Segment scheduler invalid Illegal peripheral intervention Controller in DIM AWARENESS Extended memory parity error Peripheral port stop
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
301
Troubleshooting
S901 Controller Word 69 Hex (105 Decimal)
This word contains a Stopcode that describes what kind of stop state (if any) that the machine has. A 1 in the most significant bit indicates that the controller is not running. Any other 1 bit indicates an error. It is possible to have multiple errors. For a detailed explanation of Stopcodes, see Stopcode Error Analysis, p. 277. Illegal configuration State RAM checksum error User logic checksum error Invalid node IOP failure CPU logic solver failed or coil use table (for other controllers) Real time clock error Watchdog timer expired
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
No EOL / Bad # segments State RAM test failed Start of node did not start segment Segment scheduler invalid Illegal peripheral intervention Controller in DIM AWARENESS Traffic cop error Peripheral port stop
302
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Editing .DIF Files with Microsoft Excel
Editing .DIF files with Microsoft Excel

Overview When Excel imports a .DIF file, it converts the controller addresses in the first column of the database into numerical values which ProWORX 32 cannot read. Excel also exchanges the rows and columns of the database in the .DIF files header. Unless you correct these problems, an error appears when you try to import a .DIF file back into ProWORX 32 after you have changed it in Microsoft Excel. To use Excel to edit documentation, follow these seven steps: Step One Set the size of your descriptor fields for Microsoft Excel.
Step 1 2 3 4 5 Action Select the ProWORX 32 project whose documentation you want to edit. From the project right-click menu in the navigation tree, select Properties. In the properties dialog, select the Documentation tab. Set Number of Descriptor Lines to 9. Click OK to save changes and return to ProWORX 32.
Step Two
Export your ProWORX 32 project as a .dif file.

Step 1 2 3 Action From the project right-click menu in the navigation tree, select Export Documentation. Select a path and enter a file name in the Select Destination File dialog. Click OK to export documentation.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
303
Step Three
Open and edit the documentation in Microsoft Excel.

Step 1 Action Open the .DIF file in Microsoft Excel. The number in Column A tells you what controller address the row describes. The letter in Column B tells you what information the next cells in the row contain: l D - Descriptors 1 through 9 in columns C through K. l S - Short Comments 1 through 4 in columns C through F. l L - Long Comment lookup number in column C. l T - The Page Title in column C 2 Make your changes to the documentation.
304
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Step Four
Convert the controller addresses from numbers to text.

Step 1 2 Action Find an unused column in the spreadsheet. This temporary column holds information during the conversion process. In the first cell of the unused column, type: =TEXT(A1,"00000"). This formula converts the numerical value in cell A1 into a text value which ProWORX 32 can read. When you press ENTER, the text value appears in the cell where you entered the formula. Select the cell. From the Excel menu, select Edit Copy. Select the temporary column by clicking its header. For example, if you entered the TEXT formula into the first cell of Column M, now select all of Column M. From the Excel menu, select Edit Paste. This operation pastes the TEXT formula copied from the first cell of the temporary column into all the other cells in the column. Click Yes if a warning message appears telling you that the selection is too large for Undo. The temporary column now contains the same values as Column A, but formatted as text instead of numbers. Select the entire temporary column again. From the Excel menu, select Edit Copy. Select Column A. From the Excel menu, select Edit Paste Special, then click Values. The text values from your temporary column replace the numerical values in column A. Click Yes if a warning message appears telling you that the selection is too large for Undo. Select the entire temporary column. From the Excel menu, select Edit Clear then click All. The values in your temporary column disappear. Click Yes if a warning message appears telling you that the selection is too large for Undo.
3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10
11 12
Step Five
Export the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet as a .dif file.

Step 1 Action Save the edited database as a .DIF file.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
305
Step Six
Correct the rows and columns in the .dif header.

Step 1 2 3 Action Open the .DIF file with a text editor. (Notepad or Wordpad) Switch the "VECTORS" and "TUPLES" values in the header of the .DIF file. Save the edited database as an ASCII .DIF file.
Step Seven
Import the documentation back into ProWORX 32.

Step 1 2 3 Action From the project right-click menu in the navigation tree, select Import Documentation (Append, Overlay or Create New). Select the .dif file containing the changed documentation from the Select Documentation File dialog. Click Open. The documentation of the current project is updated.
306
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Glossary
A
Address 1) On a communications network, the identifying number for a station such as a PLC. 2) In a computers or PLCs memory, a location where data, usually a specific input or output value is stored. Address Used Table Analog A list of all I/O addresses in a controller, indicating which addresses are being used in ladder logic instructions and which are not. Inputs (such as temperature) or outputs (such as motor speed) which can have a range of values. Compare to Discrete. American Standard Code for Information Interchange. 1) A way of encoding the standard text (the letters, numbers, etc. on your keyboard) your computer generates. 2) A data transmission mode for Modbus communications which sends and receives standard text. ASCII mode used 7 data bits while RTU mode uses 8. ASCII Message A text message transmitted or received by a programmable controller. These messages are sent to or from a terminal through an ASCII port. A register that accepts keyboard input for command and value entry in the Network Editor.
ASCII
Assembly Register
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
307
Glossary
Attaching to
Also called selecting. Connecting your PC to a programmable controller so ProWORX 32 can read its ladder logic, traffic cop information, and configuration, and write changes back to it.
B
Baud Rate For serial communications, the speed (in bits per second) at which data is transmitted. Binary Coded Decimal. The base-two numbering system. It has two symbols: 1 (representing On) and 0 (Off) The smallest amount of information in binary: either a 1 or a 0. The number of bits passed from one device to another in one second. Used to measure data transmission speed. A section of ladder logic which is defined while using the logic editor. This block can be copied, deleted, saved, moved, and loaded. See Bridge Multiplexer. See Bridge Plus. Allows you to connect up to four Modbus devices or networks of Modbus devices to a Modbus Plus network. Nodes on the Modbus Plus network can access slave devices connected to the BM85 Modbus ports. Links together two Modbus Plus networks. A group of eight bits. A byte stores a value from 0 to 255.
BCD Binary
Bit Bits per Second (BPS) Block
BM85 BP85 Bridge Multiplexer
Bridge Plus Byte
C
Cell A single location in ladder logic.
308
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Glossary
Channel
In an S901 I/O subsystem, a group of 128 inputs and 128 outputs assigned to a segment. The ladder logic in the segment usually controls all I/O operations of the corresponding channel. The number of characters a printer prints in one inch. (Also called horizontal pitch.)
Characters per Inch (CPI) Checksum
A calculation that sums a range of data and compares it to a pre-calculated value. This determines if the data is in error or has changed. A round cable containing two conductors, one inside the other (separated by a insulator). The inner conductor transmits a signal while the outer conductor is a shield. The descriptors, short comments, long comments, and page titles within a project. An industrial control computer, also called a programmable logic controller or PLC. Characters per Second. A list of the networks in which a particular address can be found. The cell or ladder logic element being edited. The logic editors cursor is always on the current element. The network being edited. The network displayed in the logic editor is always the current network. A bar or block which indicates a position on the screen. Generally, the cursor is located where something can be inserted or selected.
Coaxial Cable
Commentary Controller CPS Cross-Reference Current Element
Current Network
Cursor
D
Data Bits The bits in a data package which carry a message, distinct from start bits, stop bits, and parity bits. Remote Terminal Unit mode (the Modbus default communication mode) sends eight data bits per package. ASCII mode sends seven data bits per package. A printout showing the data values in a ladder logic program. A 4xxxx holding/output register.
Data Contents Data Register
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
309
Glossary
DCP Drop ID#
A distributed control processor drop address. It is equivalent to the drop number used by the DCP. A distributed control processor providing intelligent bidirectional communication between a supervisory 984 controller and distributed 984 controllers. The base-ten number system. It consists of the symbols 0 through 9. A value automatically assigned by the computer in a software program. Usually, this value can be changed. One of up to nine text strings which are a short description of an address within a ladder logic program. All descriptors, short comments, the long comment number, and the page title for one address point. The table of addresses displayed on the screen in the descriptor module. A group of printouts which consist of tables of descriptors, a table of short comments, long comments, and mismatch tables. A short description of an address within a ladder logic program. A number of descriptor fields. Any programmable unit (such as a PLC, numeric controller, or robot) or I/O card. The state of a PLC that contains no logic, configuration, or traffic cop information. A group of files and/or subdirectories. A directory called the root directory is placed on each disk when it is formatted. Subdirectories can be created within the root directory and within other subdirectories. Files can be stored in a subdirectory or the root directory. In Windows, directories are often called "folders". To stop the programmable controllers logic-solving mechanism from updating the state of a coil or updating the state of a discrete input. Also see Force. Inputs (such as switches) or outputs (such as coils) that can only be on or off. Discrete inputs are usually held in 1xxxx registers. Compare to Analog. A visual output device such as a monitor.
DCP-908
Decimal Default
Descriptor Field
Descriptor Record Descriptor Table Descriptor Tables Listing Descriptors
Device Dim Awareness Directory
Disable
Discrete
Display
310
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Glossary
Distributed I/O (DIO)
One of four major architectures for input/output systems (also see Local I/O, Remote I/O, and Peer-to-peer Communications). I/O that is installed away from the PLC over a wide area and communicates with it through a Modbus Plus network. One Quantum controller can support up to three distributed I/O networks, each with up to 64 drops. The local rack houses a DIO processor for each network, which sets the networks head number. A description of a controllers memory, logic, and configuration. The descriptors, short comments, long comments, and page titles within a database. The editor in which descriptors, short comments, long comments, and page titles can be entered and modified. A 32-bit format which uses two registers to store numerical values. A group of I/O cards physically connected together as an I/O network. A controller reads information from the drop, solves logic, then writes results to the drop in one segment of ladder logic. The Segment Scheduler controls the order in which drops are serviced. An output coil address which has been assigned to more than one coil.
Documentation
Documentation Editor Double Precision Drop
Duplicate Coil
E
EEPROM Element Enable Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read-Only Memory. A ladder logic instruction such as a coil, timer, or short. To allow a PLC, based on the logic programmed into it, to update the state of a coil or input. A special section of logic that lets the programmer solve regular mathematical equations within the network. Not supported by every controller. A format for numbers based on powers of 10. For example, +1.35E-4 indicates 1.35 multiplied by 10 to the power of -4 (i.e. with an exponent of -4), which works out to 0.000135. Extra register memory available for some models of 984/584 controllers. It is accessed through the XMRD and XMWT functions.
Equation Network Exponential Notation
Extended Memory
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
311
Glossary
Extension
The three letters after the period in a DOS file name, often used to indicate the files purpose.
F
File File Name A collection of information stored on a disk. It can contain either a program or data. The name of a file. ProWORX 32 uses DOS naming conventions: a file name can have up to eight characters, followed by a period and a three character extension. To change the state of a coil or a discrete input, overriding any actions in ladder logic. For example, if a coil is forced off, but the ladder logic is trying to turn it on, it will remain off. A ProWORX 32 command or operation.
Force
Function
G
Global Address Change An operation in the Logic Editor which substitutes one address or a range of addresses for another or several others.
H
Head A collection of I/O drops tied to one CPU, DIO, or RIO processor. This term is specific to Modicons Quantum hardware. A base 16 representation of an integer. It uses the symbols 0 through 9 and letters A through F.
Hexadecimal
I
I/O Input/Output.
312
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Glossary
I/O Configurator
A PLC internal operation that maps logic element addresses to physical I/O cards. Also known as the Traffic Cop. One of the programmable controllers instruction set.
Instruction
L
Ladder Logic A relay-based programming language typically used in programmable logic controllers. So called because it looks vaguely like a ladder. Text information, notes, and other descriptions of the ladder logic.
Ladder Logic Documentation Ladder Logic Listing Latch Lines Per Page Load Loader
A printout of a group of networks which make up a ladder logic program.
A coil, the state of which is backed up in memory. The number of lines printed on a page when printing ladder logic listings. To retrieve data from a disk or other source. A module that reads and writes ladder logic from a personal computer to a programmable controller or an industrial programming terminal. It also starts and stops a programmable controller from a personal computer. One of four major architectures for input/output systems (also see Distributed I/O, Remote I/O, and Peer-to-peer Communications). The PLC and I/O modules communicate directly through wiring from the field. For Quantum controllers, local I/ O allows a CPU, power supply, and from one through 14 I/O modules in a single backplane (up to 448 I/O points). Local I/O is limited to a single rack and is always head number 0. RIO and DIO processors are added in the local rack to extend the controllers I/O system. The editor in which you edit ladder logic. A block of text which comment on an address within a ladder logic program. These are printed between the networks in the ladder listing. Lines per inch.
Local I/O
Logic Editor Long Comment
LPI
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
313
Glossary
M
Machine Word Macro 16 bits of data (two bytes). Also called a word. Generic pieces of logic networks that can be inserted into main logic databases. See also Macro Parameter. A "placeholder" variable used in a macro. When inserted into a regular logic database, each macro parameter is mapped to a real register address. A networked device which controls the devices it connects to. Compare to Slave. The part of a computer or programmable controller which stores information for manipulation. Two printouts which show the differences between two sets of data; for example, between descriptor records that have been entered for PLC addresses and addresses that have actually been used in a program. 1) A memory aid. 2) A computer instruction with an abbreviated name that indicates its function. For example, BLKM is used for the Block Move instruction. Mnemonic Assignments Modbus Modbus Plus Modem A table in the configuration menu that lists the configuration of function key levels, prompts, and instruction mnemonics. Modicons RS-232C master-slave serial communications protocol. Modicons high-speed, peer-to-peer, token-ring communications protocol. Modulator/Demodulator. A communications device that allows a computer to transmit information, usually over a standard telephone line. An input/output card. Usually, an I/O drop tied to an ICC410, 3220, or 3240 motion control system.
Macro Parameter
Master Memory
Mismatch Tables
Mnemonic (ne-mon-ik)
Module Motion Control I/O Drop
314
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Glossary
N
Network 1) A unit of ladder logic in a matrix of elements that is 11 columns wide and seven rows long. It is used to group a functions ladder logic. 2) A chain of interconnected computers and/or programmable controllers which share data. Network Comment Network Listing Network Logic A descriptor record assigned to a network. Contains short comments, a long comment, a page title and descriptors. A printout of a group of networks of ladder logic which make up a program. A programmable controller control program or the representation of a programmable controller control program. It includes logic elements, networks, and register contents. A device that is connected to a network and is capable of communicating with other network devices, usually to send or receive I/O data. A printout of those programmable controller addresses in a ladder logic program which do not have descriptor records.
Node
Not Described Mismatch Table
O
Offline When the computer is not connected to the programmable controller and works instead from a database. When the computer is connected to a programmable controller, working with it directly and in real time. In mathematics (and in Equation Networks), a symbol or character that indicates a specific operation to be performed on one or more elements, called operands. In "3 + Y", the plus sign (+) is an operator that indicates addition between the two operands, "3" and "Y". 1) The order in which segments are solved, as ordered by the Segment Scheduler.
Online
Operator
Order of Solve
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
315
Glossary
2) The order in which elements are solved in a network.
P
Page Title A line of text which describes a page or group of pages in a ladder logic listing. Printed at the top of the page. The part of a file specification that indicates the drive and subdirectory the file is in. Personal Computer One of four major architectures for input/output systems (also see Distributed I/O, Local I/O, and Remote I/O). A protocol for networked devices in which any device can initiate data transfer. In logic, an instruction is highlighted if it solves true and passes power. All instructions "upstream" of it (to its left in the Traffic Cop display) must also be passing power. The maximum value a timer or counter can have. A Programmable Logic Controller. For PLCs, a set of ladder logic instructions contained in a set of ProWORX 32 files (a Project). An industrial control computer, also known simply as a controller.
Path PC Peer-to-Peer
Power Flow
Preset Processor Program
Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) Project
A group of files sharing a common name (but different file extensions) where the ladder logic program and descriptor data for a controller is stored. A ProWORX 32 command or operation.
ProWORX 32 Function
316
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Glossary
Q
Quick Print A function that allows you to print a network to a printer, with or without documentation.
R
Rack Radix A collection of up to 16 I/O modules mounted in one back plane. The base system of a value. The radix of decimal numbers is 10, the radix of binary numbers is 2 and the radix of hexadecimal numbers is 16. In ProWORX 32, the term "radix" sometimes refers to a values data type: binary, integer, floating point and so on. Random Access Memory. Memory that holds programs while they are being executed. Memory that is not erased by a power failure and that is programmed at the factory to hold vital information. This memory cannot be changed. One of four major architectures for input/output systems (also see Distributed I/O, Local I/O, and Peer-to-peer Communications). I/O that is installed away from the PLC and communicates with it though a high-performance, S908 coaxial cable network. For Quantum controllers, an interface device at each remote I/O drop communicates with an RIO processor in the PLC. The interface device sets the address of the drop. Each RIO processor supports up to 31 remote drops, each of which allows 64 input words and 64 output words. A data transmission mode used for Modbus communications. RTU uses 8 data bits.
Random Access Memory (RAM) Read Only Memory (ROM) Remote I/O (RIO)
Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) Reports Listing
A group of printouts which consist of hardware allocation, data usage, and data contents for a ladder logic program. The sequence of devices through which a message passes to reach its final destination. A popular standard for a serial data link connection.
Routing Path
RS-232
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
317
Glossary
Run Light
A light on the front panel of a controller that is on while the controller is running.
S
Save Search Segment To store information on a disk. To locate a specified network element (or elements) in the ladder logic. A group of I/O networks solved as a unit by the programmable controller. The Segment Scheduler controls the frequency of segment execution and order of I/O operations. Each segment controls two I/O channels in a 584 or 984/S901 configuration, or one drop in a 984/S908 configuration. A 9- or 25- pin port used for serial communications (for example, Modbus). Up to four lines of text which comprise a comment about an address within a PLC ladder logic program. Typically printed beside output instructions in the ladder listing. One of up to four lines of text which comprise a comment about an address within a PLC network logic program. Typically printed beside output instructions, or below the network in the network listing. A networked device controlled by another device. Slave devices to not initiate data transactions. Compare to Master. The position of an I/O module in a rack. In logic, an instruction is highlighted if it solves true instead of only when it passes power (compare to Power Flow). Bits used to indicate the end of transmission of a data item or frame. A directory within a directory. For a PLC, one cycle of scanning inputs, solving logic, and writing outputs.
Serial Port Short Comment
Short Comment Field
Slave
Slot State Flow
Stop Bits Subdirectory Sweep
318
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Glossary
T
TCP/IP A communication protocol for computers connected through an Ethernet or Token Ring network. A collection of ASCII characters. If communications fail, the program waits the specified number of seconds before trying to communicate again. An operation in the Network Editor that locates a specified output coil in the network logic. A programmable controllers internal configuration that maps logic element addresses to physical I/O cards.
Text Timeout
Trace
Traffic Cop
U
Used Table A list of all I/O addresses in a controller, indicating which addresses are being used in instructions and which have not. A computer program included in a software package, but run separately from the packages main program.
Utility
W
Word 16 bits of data (two bytes). Also called a machine word.
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
319
Glossary
320
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Index
Symbols
.CSV, 56 .DBF, 56 .DIF, 56 Editing with MS Excel, 303 .DOC, 56 .FIL, 56 .FIS, 56 .MDB, 56 .TEF, 56 .TXT, 56 .XLS, 56
Authorization Moving, 18 ProWORX 32, 17
B
Bitmap Files, in the HMI Window, 184 BM85 Bridge Multiplexer, 220 BootP Server, 223 Listening, 223 Bridge Multiplexer, 220 Configuring, 220 Modbus Ports, Configuring, 221 Troubleshooting, 222
A
Address Used Tables, 60 Address Used Tables, Printing, 236 Addresses Finding Free, 61 Finding in Ladder Logic, 142 Forcing Discretes, 143 in the Logic Editor, 142 Tracking in the Data Watch Window, 177 Tracking, in Ladder Logic, 143 Analyze Device, 100 ASCII Messages Configuring, 209 Editor, 209 Tools for Editing, 211 Audit Trail, 243
C
Clamps, in the Data Watch Window, 182 Client/Server, 35 Coils, in the Equation Network, 155 Communications Ethernet Gateway, 72 Modbus, 67 Modbus by Modem, 68 Modbus Plus, 71 Setup, 66 TCP/IP, 73 Compact Phase II Configuration Extension, 104 Compare Projects and Controllers, 226 Reporting, 227
321
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Index
Conditional Expressions, 160 Configuration Extensions Compact Phase II, 104 Data Protect, 105 I/O Scanner, 108 I/O Scanner Wizard, 111 Overview, 102 Peer Cop, 113 Peer Cop Wizard, 118 Profibus, 121 Profibus Wizard, 122 Quantum Hot Standby, 106 Quantum VME Bus, 126 S980, 123 SY/MAX, 124 TCP/IP, 125 Configuring a BM85, 220 Configuring Controllers ASCII Ports, 82 General Tab, 77 Loadables Tab, 83 Overview, 76 Ports Tab, 80 Simple ASCII Ports, 81 Contacting Schneider Electric, 26 Controllers Comparing, 226 Configuring Configuring Controllers, 76 Initializing Logic, 90 Manual Procedure List, 274 Pinging, 229 Reading From, 91 Selecting, 31 Start/Stop, 98 Status, 99 Writing to, 92 Controls Script Editor, 252 Converting Ladder Logic Databases, 34
Data Watch Window Clamps, 182 DRUM Summary, 205 General Properties, 181 HMI, 184 Importing and Exporting, 207 Instruction Editor, 193 Log Files, 182 Logic Editor Addresses, Tracking, 191 PID Tuner, 202 Radicies, 181 Radicies, Setting, 178 Register Editor, 201 Sample Rate, 183 Terminal Block, 193 Traffic Cop Addresses, Tracking, 192 Trend, 188 Triggers, 181 Watch Window, 177 Desriptor Ranges, Printing, 235 Diagnostic Trace, 148 Documentation Importing and Exporting, 55 Documentation Editor Overview, 51 Using, 53 Documentation, Printing, 235 Drops, 165 DRUM Summary, 205
E
EEPROM, 94 Emulation, 39 Adding Instruction Solve Support, 46 Emulation Tab, 39 Enable Contact, Setting, 155 Environment Tab, 19 Equation Networks Enable Contact, Setting, 155 Equation Formatting, 156 Mathematical Functions, 161 Mathematical Operations, 158 Overview, 154
D
Data Protect Configuration Extension, 105
322
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Index
Equations Exponential Notation, 157 Formatting, 156 Ethernet Gateway Communications, 72 EXECLoader, 95 Exporting Data Watch Window Data, 207 Documentation, 55 Extended Memory Addresses Displaying in the Register Editor, 201
F
Faults, Isolating, 273 Files .ESF (Emulation Solve Files, 46 Bitmap, in the HMI Window, 184 Log Files, in the Data Watch Window, 182 Find, 59 Finding Free Addresses, 61 Flash RAM, 96 Forcing Discrete Addresses, 143
H
Hardware Clock, 152 HMI Background Color, Setting, 184 Bitmap Files, Creating, 184 Bitmap Files, Using, 185 Cell Captions, Using, 186 Cell Data, Editing, 185 Monitor Values, Adding, 187 Overview, 184 Rows and Columns, Setting, 184 Hotkey Template, 132
I/O Cards 800 Series, 258 A120 Series, 261 Adding New, 246 Compact TSX Series, 263 Micro Series, 265 Momentum M1 and INTERBUS Series, 266 Quantum, 267 Script Editor, 249 Script Editor, Using the, 249 Sy/MAX Series, 270 I/O Drawing Generator, 171 Viewer, 228 I/O Scanner Configuration Extension Editing, 108 Wizard, 111 Importing Data Watch Window Data, 207 Documentation, 55 Initializing Controller Logic, 90 Installing ProWORX 32, 15 Instruction Editor Display Scripts, 194 Overview, 193 Instructions Finding in Ladder Logic, 140 in the Logic Editor, 140 Internal Flash, 97 ISA Symbols, 146
K
Knowledge Base, 62
L
Ladder Logic Addresses, Finding, 142 Addresses, Tracking, 143 Initializing in a Controller, 90 Instructions, 140 Networks, 138 Loadable Library Wizard, 86
I
I/O Drops, 165 Racks, 166 Slots, 167
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
323
Index
Loadables Copying, 84 Deleting, 85 Updating, 84 Log Files Setting the File Size in the Data Watch Window, 182 Logging In to ProWORX 32, 16 Logging Out of ProWORX 32, 16 Logic Editor Bookmarks, 151 Diagnostic Trace, 148 Display, Customizing, 130 Equation Network, 154 Hardware Clock, 152 Instructions, 140 ISA Symbols, 146 Networks, 138 Overview, 129 Properties, 130 Segment Scheduler, 153 Sweep, 149 Tracking Addresses in the Data Watch Window, 191
Modem Communications, 68 Modsoft Hotkeys, 133 Moving Authorization, 18
N
NetScan Network Explorer, 74 Network Explorer, 74 Networks, 138 Printing, 235
O
Offline Edit Mode, 135 Online, Undo/Redo, 137 Opcodes, Editing, 87
P
PCMCIA, 97 Peer Cop Configuration Extension Global Input, 114 Global Output, 114 Overview, 113 Specific Input, 116 Specific Output, 116 Subfields, 115 Wizard, 118 PID Block Overview, 202 Tuner, 202 Ping, 229 PLC Status Viewer, 99 Ports ASCII, 82 Micro, 82 Modbus, 80 Simple ASCII, 81 Profibus Configuration Extension Overview, 121 Wizard, 122 Project Emulation, 39 Project Properties Tab, 37
M
Macros, 214 Unlinking, 218 Using in Logic, 216 Marks, in Ladder Logic, 151 Materials List, 172 Mathematical Functions, 161 Mathematical Operations, 158 MBP Stat, 230 Micro Flash RAM, 96 Mismatch Tables, Printing, 237 Mnemonics, 144 Modbus Communications, 67 Modbus Plus Concept Exec Loader, Communications, 276 LED Indicator, 276 Modbus Plus Communications, 71 ModConnect Schneider Alliances, 246
324
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Index
Projects Combined, 37 Converting, 34 Creating, 29 Emulation, 36 Managing, 35 Offline, 36 Online, 36 Selecting a Controller, 31 Wizard, 29 Protected Registers, 58 ProWORX 32 Authorization, 17 Contacting Support, 26 Environment, 19 Installing, 15 Logging In, 16 Reporting, 233 Security, 20 Server, 240 System Requirements, 14 Toolbar, 23 ProWORXPLUS Hotkeys, 134
Reporting, 233
S
S901 Analyzing, 100 S908 Analyzing, 100 Errors, 300 S980 Configuration Extension, 123 Sample Rate, in the Data Watch Window, 183 Schneider Alliances I/O Card Script Editor, 249 I/O Cards, 246 Overview, 246 Schneider Electric Contacting, 26 Support Guidelines, 26 Script Editor Controls, 252 Overview, 249 Using, 249 Scripts Functions, Terminal Block/Instruction Editor, 196 I/O Cards, 249 Instruction Editor, 194 Terminal Block, 194 Variables, Terminal Block/Instruction Editor, 195 Search, 59 Search Panel, 59 Segment Scheduler, 153 Server Creating Groups, 241 Creating Users, 241 Logging On, 240 Overview, 240 Setting Communications, 240 Status, 242 Slots, 167 Solve Mode, Emulation, 42 Starting a Controller, 98 Stopcode Error Analysis, 277 Stopping a Controller, 98
325
Q
Quantum Hot Standby Configuration Extension, 106 Quantum VME Bus Configuration Extension, 126 Quick Picks, 234
R
Racks, 166 Radix Multi Radix View, Setting, 181 Setting Multiple Addresses, 178 Single Radix View, Setting, 181 Reading From a Controller, 91 Redo, in Logic, 136 Register Editor, 201 Register, Printing, 236 Registers Protected, 58
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002
Index
Sweep Constant Sweep, Performing, 149 Overview, 149 Single Sweep, Performing, 149 SY/MAX Configuration Extension, 124 Symbols ISA, 146 System Requirements, 14
U
Undo, in Logic, 136 Uninstalling ProWORX 32, 15
W
Writing to a Controller, 92
T
Tables Address Used, 60 TCP/IP Communications, 73 TCP/IP Configuration Extension, 125 Terminal Block Display Scripts, 194 Overview, 193 Toolbar, 23 Tracking Ladder Logic Addresses, 143 Traffic Cop Drops, 165 Online Module Status, 169 Overview, 164 Printing, 236 Racks, 166 Slots, 167 Tracking Addresses in the Data Watch Window, 192 Transferring Memory EEPROM, 94 EXECLoader, 95 Flash RAM, 96 PCMCIA, 97 Trend Alarm, Setting, 188 Graph Functionality, 189 Graph Functionality Table, 190 Overview, 188 Resolution, Setting, 188 Setpoint, Setting, 188 Y-Axis Values, Setting, 188 Triggers, in the Data Watch Window, 181 Troubleshooting, 271 Isolating Faults, 273
326
372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002

PLC Proworx32 Software User Manual v1.0

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PLC Proworx32 Software User Manual v1.0

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PLC Proworx32 Software User Manual v1.0

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ProWORX 32

Programming Software for PLCs User Guide

372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002

Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 About the Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Chapter 1 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Working with Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002

Working with Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Configuration Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002

Quantum VME Bus Extension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Using the Logic Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Using the Traffic Cop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Using the Data Watch Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002

Working with the ASCII Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Working with Macros. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

ProWORX 32 Utilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

ProWORX 32 Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

ProWORX 32 Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Schneider Alliances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

I/O Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002

Editing .DIF Files with Microsoft Excel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002

372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002

372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002

372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002

About the Book

372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002

About the Book

Product Related Warnings

372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002

Getting Started with ProWORX 32 Whats in this Chapter?

This chapter contains the following topics:

372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002

372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002

Modifying or Repairing the ProWORX 32 Installation

If you have already installed ProWORX 32:

Uninstalling (Removing) ProWORX 32

If you have already installed ProWORX 32:

372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002

Logging In to the ProWORX 32 Server

Logging Out of the ProWORX 32 Server

372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002

Using the Authorization Wizard

After opening the authorization wizard:

372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002

After selecting Transfer Authorization in Step One:

Entering the Authorization Number

After receiving an authorization number:

372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002

The ProWORX 32 Environment

Setting ProWORX 32 Properties

372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002

ProWORX 32 Client Security

372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002

User rights descriptions:

372 SPU 780 01EMAN May 2002

Using Tracking Help